r^ GIFT OF s ton Campbell, Jr. Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2008 with funding from Microsoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofmechanOOpeckrich ELEMENTS OF MEC HAN ICS TREATED BY MEANS OF THE DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. BY WILLIAM G. PECK, Ph.D., LL.D., PROFESSOB OF MATHEMATICS, ASTRONOMY, AND MECHANICS, COLUMBIA COLLEGE. S. BARNES & COMPANY, NEW YORK, CHICAGO. AND NEW ORLEANS. Engineer...* C^" V*> N library ?\pV PUBLISHERS' NOTICE. PECK'S MATHEMATICAL SERIES. CONCISE, CONSECUTIVE, AND COMPLETE. I. FIRST LESSONS IN NUMBERS. II. MANUAL OF PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC. III. COMPLETE ARITHMETIC. IV. MANUAL OF ALGEBRA. V. MANUAL OF GEOMETRY. VI. TREATISE ON ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY VII. DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. VIII. ELEMENTARY MECHANICS (without the Calculus). XL ELEMENTS OF MECHANICS (with the Calculus). Note. — Teachers and others, discovering errors in any of the above works, will confer a favor by communicating them to us. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1859, by WILLIAM G . PECK, In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. P E E F A C E The following work was undertaken to supply a want felt by the author, when engaged in teaching Natural Philosophy to College classes. In selecting a text-book on the subject of Mechanics, there was no want of material from which to choose ; but to find one of the exact grade for College instruction, was a matter of much difficulty. The higher treatises were found too difficult to be read with profit, except by a few in each class, in addition to which they were too extensive to be studied, even by the few, in the limited time allotted to this branch of education. The simpler treatises were found too elementary for advanced classes, and on account of their non-mathematical character, not adapted to prepare the student for subsequent investi- gations in Science. The present volume was intended to occupy the middle ground between these two 2lasses of works, and to form a connecting link between the Elementary and the Higher Treatises. It was designed to embrace all of the important propositions of Elementary Mechanics, arranged in logical order, and each rigidly demonstrated. If these designs 834136 IV PREFACE. have been accomplished, this volume can be read with facility and advantage, not only by College classes, but by the higher classes in Academies and High Schools ; it will be found to contain a sufficient amount of information for those who want either the leisure or the desire to make the mathematical sciences a specialty ; and finally, it will serve as a suitable introduction to those higher treatises on Mechanical Philosophy, which all must study who would appreciate and keep pace with the wonderful discoveries that are daily being made in Science. Columbia College, February 22, 18ft<» PKEFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. In accordance with the expressed wish of many teach- ers in institutions where the Differential and Integral Calculus are either not taught at all, or else are not obligatory studies, an Appendix has been added to the body of the work, in which all of the principles there demonstrated by means of the Calculus are deduced by the aid of Elementary Mathematics only. It has not seemed desirable to omit the Calculus altogether, especially as by the present arrangement the work is equally adapted to the use of those who teach by the aid of the Calculus, and of those who only em- ploy the Elementary Mathematics. From the flattering reception of this work by the P iblic, it is believed that a continuation of the Course of Natural Philosophy, of which this is the opening vol- ume, would be acceptable. To carry out this design, VI PREFACE. two other volumes are in preparation on the same gen- eral plan as the present, one of which will be devoted to the subjects of Acoustics and Optics, and the other to Heat and the Steam-Engine, Electricity, and May- netism. February 22, I860. CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. FAO» Definitions— Rest and Motion 13 Forces 14 Gravity 15 Weight— Mass 16 Momentum — Properties of Bodies 17 Definition of Mechanics — Measure of Forces 21 Representation of Forces 23 CHAPTER II. Composition of Forces whose Directions coincide 25 Parallelogram of Forces 26 Parallelopipedon of Forces 27 Geometrical Composition and Resolution of Forces 28 Components in the Direction of two Axes 30 Components in the Direction of three Axes 32 Projection of Forces 34 Composition of a Group of Forces in a Plane 35 Composition of a Group of Forces in Space 36 Expression for the Resultant of two Forces 37 Principle of Moments 40 Principle of Virtual Moments 43 vii Vlll CONTENTS. PAG* Resultant of Parallel Forces 45 Composition and Resolution — Parallel Forces 4S Lever arm of the Resultant 51 Centre of Parallel Forces 52 Resultant of a Group in a Plane 53 Tendency to Rotation — Equilibrium in a Plane 58 Equilibrium of Forces in Space 59 Equilibrium of a Revolving Body 60 CHAPTER III. Weight— Centre of Gravity 62 Centre of Gravity of Straight Line 64 Of Symmetrical Lines and Areas 64 Of a Triangle 65 Of a Parallelogram— Of a Trapezoid 66 Of a Polygon 67 Of a Pyramid 68 Of Prisms, Cylinders, and Polyhedrons 70 Centre of Gravity Experimentally 71 Centre of Gravity by means of the Calculus 72 Centre of Gravity of an Arc of a Circle 73 Of a Parabolic Area 74 Of a Semi-Ellipsoid 75 Pressure and Stability 80 Problems in Construction 85 CHAPTER IV. Definition of a Machine 94 Elementary Machines — Cord 96 The Lever 98 Tho Compound Lever 101 The Elbow-joint Press 102 The Balance 103 CONTENTS. IX PAGE. The Steelyard • 105 The Bent Lever Balance— Compound Balances 106 The Inclined Plane HO The Pulley 112 Single Pulley 113 Combinations of Pulleys 115 The Wheel and Axle 1 IV Combinations of Wheels and Axles 118 The Windlass 119 The Capstan— The Differential Windlass 120 Wheel-work 121 The Screw 123 The Differential Screw 125 Endless Screw 126 The Wedge 1 27 General Remarks on Machines 129 Friction 130 Limiting Angle of Resistance 133 Rolling Friction — Adhesion 135 Stiffness of Cords 136 Atmospheric Resistance — Friction on Inclined Planes 137 Line of least Fraction 140 Friction on Axle 141 CHAPTER V. Uniform Motion 143 Varied Motion 144 Uniformly Varied Motion 146 Application to Falling Bodies 148 Bodies Projected Upwards 150 Restrained Vertical Motion 153 Atwood's Machines 156 Motion on Inclined Planes 158 Motion down a Succession of Incline* Planes 161 Periodic Motion 163 X C0NTENT8. tmam, Angular Velocity 165 The Simple Pendulum 166 The Compound Pendulum 169 Practical Applications of the Pendulum 175 Graham's and Harrison's Pendulums 176 Basis of a System of Weights and Measures 177 Centre of Percussion 179 Moment of Inertia 180 Application of Calculus to Moment of Inertia 182 Centre of Gvration 186 CHAPTER VI. Motion of Projectiles 18S Centripetal and Centrifugal Forces •. . 197 Measure of Centrifugal Force 197 Centrifugal Force of Extended Masses 203 Principal Axes 206 Experimental Illustrations 207 Elevation of the outer rail of a Curved track 209 The Conical Pendulum 210 The Governor 212 Work 215 Work, when the Power acts obliquely '217 Work, when the Body moves on a Curve 219 Rotation— Quantity of Work 225 Accumulation of Work 225 Living Force of Revolving Bodies 227 Fly Wheels 228 Composition of Rotations 230 Application to Gyroscope 232 CHAPTER VII. Classification of Fluids 236 Principle of Equal Pressures 236 CONTENTS. XI PAGE. Pressure due to Weight 238 Centre of Pressure on a Plane Surface 243 Buoyant Effect of Fluids 249 Floating Bodies ' 249 Specific Gravity 251 Hydrostatic Balance 253 Specific Gravity of an Insoluble Body 253 Specific Gravity of Liquids' 254 Specific Gravity of Soluble Bodies 255 Specific Gravity of Air and Gases 256 Hydrometers — Nicholson's Hydrometer 25*7 Scale Areometer 258 Volumeter 259 Densimeter 260 Centesimal Alcoholometer of Gay Lussac 261 Thermometer 263 Velocity of a Liquid through an Orifice 265 Spouting of Liquids on Horizontal Planes 268 Modifications due to Pressures 269 Coefficients of Efflux and Velocity 270 Efflux through short Tubes 272 Motion of Water in open Channels 274 Motion of Water in Pipes 277 General Remarks 27 9 Capillary Phenomena 280 Elevation and Depression between Plates 281 Attraction and Repulsion of Floating Bodies 282 Applications of the principle of Capillarity 283 Sndosmose and Exosmose 284 CHAPTER VIII. Gases and Vapors 286 Atmospheric Air 285 Atmospheric Pressure 286 Mariotte's Law 287 Xll CONTENTS. PAGE. Gay Lussac's Law 290 Manometers — The open Manometer 291 The closed Manometer 292 The Siphon Gttage 294 The Barometer — Siphon Barometer 295 The Cistern Barometer 296 Uses of the Barometer 297 Difference of Level 298 Work of Expanding Gas or Vapor 304 Efflux of a Gas or Vapor 306 Steam 3"S Work of Steam 310 Experimental Formulas 311 CHAPTER IX. Pumps — Sucking and Lifting Pumps 313 Sucking and Forcing Pump 318 Fire Engine 321 The Rotary Pump 322 Hydrostatic Press 324 The Siphon 326 Wurtemburg and Intermitting Siphon 328 Intermitting Springs ; 328 Siphon of Constant Flow — Hydraulic Ram 329 Archimedes' Screw. 331 The Chain Pump— The Air Pump 332 Artificial Fountains— Hero's Ball 336 Hero's Fountain 837 Wine-Taster and Dropping Bottle 338 The Atmospheric Inkstand 838 MECHANICS CHAPTEK I. DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. Definition of Natural Philosophy. . 1. Natural Philosophy is that branch of Science which treats of the laws of the material universe. These laws are called laws of nature / and it is assumed that they are constant, that is, that like causes always pro- duce like effects. This principle, which is the basis of all Science, is an inductive truth founded upon universal experi- ence. Definition of a Body. 2. A Body is a collection of material particles. When the dimensions of a body are exceedingly small, it is called a material point. Rest and Motion. 3. A body is at rest when it retains the same absolute position in space ; it is in motion when it continually changes its position. A body is at rest with respect to surrounding objects, when it retains the same relative position with respect to them ; it is in motion with respect to them, when it con- tinually changes this relative position. These states are called relative rest and relative motion, to distinguish them from absolute rest and absolute motion. It is highly prob- able that no object in the universe is in a state of absolute rest. 14 MECHANICS. Trajectory. 4. The path traced out, or described by a moving point, is called its trajectory. When this trajectory is a straight line, the motion is rectilinear ; when it is a curved line, the motion is curvilinear. Translation and Rotation. 5. When all of the points of a body move in parallel straight lines, the motion is called motion of translation / when the points of a body describe arcs of circles about a straight line, the motion is called motion of rotation. Other varieties of motion result from a combination of these two. Uniform and Varied Motion. 6. The velocity of a moving point, is its rate of motion. When the point moves over equal spaces in any arbitrary equal portions of time, the motion is uniform, and the velocity is constant • when it moves over unequal spaces in equal portions of time, the motion is varied, and the velocity is variable. If the velocity continually increases, the motion is (C'cderated ; if it continually decreases, the motion is retarded. Forces. 7. A FoncE is anything which tends to change the state of a body with respect to rest or motion. If a body is at rest, anything which tends to put it in motion is a force ; if it is in motion, anything which tends to make it move faster, or slower, is a force. The power with which a force acts, is called its intensity. Forces are of two kinds : extraneous^ those which act upon a body from without ; molecular, those which are exerted between adjacent particles of bodies. An extraneous force may act for an instant and then cease, in which ease it is called an impulse, or an impulsive force ; or it may act continuously, in which ease it is called an sant force An incessant force may be regarded as made up of a succession of impulses acting at equal but exceedingly small intervals of time. When these successive DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 15 impulses are equal, the force is constant; when they are unequal, the force is variable. The force of gravity at any given place, is an example of a constant force ; the effort of expanding steam, is an example of a variable force. Molecular forces are of two kinds; attractive, those which tend to draw particles together ; repellent, those which tend to separate them. These forces also exert an arranging power by virtue of which the particles of bodies are grouped into definite shapes. The phenomena of crystalization pre- sent examples of this action. Molecular forces of both kinds are continually exerted between the particles of all bodies, and upon their variation, in intensity and direction, depend the conditions of bodies, whether solid, liquid, or gaseous. Classification of Bodies. 8. Bodies are divided into two classes, solids and fluids. A solid is a body which has a tendency to retain a perma- nent form. The particles of a solid adhere to each other so as to require the action of an extraneous force of greater or less intensity to separate them. A fluid is a body whose particles move freely amongst each other, each particle yield- ing to the slightest force. Fluids are divided into liquids and gases, liquids being sensibly incompressible, whilst gases are highly compressible. Many bodies are capable of exist- ing in either of these states according to their temperature. Thus ice, water, and steam, are simply three different states of the same body. Gravity. 9. Experiment and observation have shown that the earth exercises a force of attraction upon all bodies, tending to draw them towards its centre. This force, which is exerted upon every particle of every body, is called the force of gravity. " When a body is supported, the force of gravity produces pressure or weight \ when it is unsupported, the force pro- duces motion. Experiment and observation have shown tl it the entire force of attraction exerted by the earth upon any body, varies directly as the quantity of matter in the body, 16 MECHANICS. and inversely as the square of its distance from the centre of the earth. This force of attraction is mutual, so that the body attracts the earth according to the same law. Obser- vation has shown that this law of mutual attraction extends throughout the universe, and for this reason it has received the name of imiversal gravitation. Weight. 10. The weight of a body is the resultant action of the force of gravity upon all of its particles. If the body there- fore remain the same, its weight at different places will vary directly as the force of gravity, or inversely as the square of its distance from the centre of the earth. Mass. 11. The mass of a body is the quantity of matter which it contains. Were the force of gravity the same at every point of the earth's surface, the weight of a body might be taken as the measure of its mass. But it is found that the force of gravity increases slightly in passing from the equa- tor towards either pole, and consequently the weight of the same body increases as it is moved from the equator towards either pole ; its mass, however, remains the same. If we take the weight of a body at the equator as the measure of its mass, it follows from what has just been said, that the mass will be equal to the weight at any place, divided by the force of gravity at that place, the force of gravity at the equator being regarded as the unit ; or, denoting the mass of any- body by 3/, its weight at any place by W, and the force of gravity at that place by g, we shall have W M = — ; whence, W = Mg. The expression for the mass of a body is constant, as it should be, since the quantity of matter remains the same. The rxrr of mass is any definite mass assumed as a stand- ard of comparison. It may be one pound, one ounce, or any DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 17 other unit of weight, taken at the equator. The pound is generally assumed as the unit of mass. The terms weight and mass may be regarded as synonymous, provided we un- derstand that the weight is taken at the equator. Density. 12. The density of a body is the quantity of matter contained in a unit of volume of the body, or it is the mass of a unit of volume. At the same place the densities of two bodies are propor- tional to the weights of equal volumes. The mass of any body is therefore equal to its volume multiplied by its den- sity, or denoting the volume by V, and the density by D, we have M= VB. We have also, M W D = y = yr ; whence, W = VDg. Momentum. 1 3. The momentum of a moving body, or its quantity of motion, is the product obtained by multiplying the mass moved, by the velocity with which it is moved ; that is, we multiply the number of units in the mass moved by the num- ber of units in the velocity with which it is moved and the product is the number of units in the momentum. This will be explained more in detail hereafter. Properties of Bodies. 14. All bodies are endowed with certain attributes, or properties, the most important of which are, magnitude and form / impenetrability ; mobility ; inertia / divisibility, and porosity ; compressibility, dilatibility and elasticity ; at- traction, repulsion, and polarity. Magnitude and Form. 15. Magnitude is that property of a body by virtue of which it occupies a definite portion of space ; every body 18 MECHANICS. possesses the three attributes of extension, length, breadth, and height. The form of a body is its figure or shape. Impenetrability. 16. Impenetrability is that property by virtue of which no two bodies can occupy the same space at the same time. The particles of one body may be thrust aside by those of another, as when a nail is driven into wood ; but where one body is, no other body can be. Mobility. 17. Mobility is that property by virtue of winch a body may be made to occupy different positions at different in- stants of time. Since a body cannot occupy two positions at the same instant, a certain interval must elapse whilst the body is passing from one position to another. Hence motion requires time, the idea of time bemg very closely connected with that of motion. Inertia. 1§. Inertia is that property by virtue of which a body tends to continue in the state of rest or motion in which it may be placed, until acted upon by some force. A body at rest cannot set itself in motion, nor can a body in motion in- crease or diminish its rate, or change the direction of its mo- tion. Hence, if a body is at rest, it icill remain at rest, or if it is in motion, it will continue to move uniformly in a straight line, until acted vpon by some force. This princi- ple is called the lav: of inertia. It follows immediately from this law, that if a force act upon a body in motion, it will impart the same velocity, and in the same general di- rection as though the body were at rest. It also follows that if a body, free to move, be acted upon simultaneously by two or more forces in the same, or in different directions, it will move in the general direction of each force, as though the other did not exi^t. When a force acts upon a body at rest to produce motion, or upon a body in motion to change that motion, a resistance is developed equal and directly opposed to the effective force DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 19 exerted. This resistance, due to inertia, is called the force of inertia. The effect of this resistance is called re-action, and the principle just explained may be expressed by saying that action and re-action are equal and directly opposed. This principle is called the law of action and re-action. These two laws are deduced from observation and experi- ment, and upon them depends the mathematical theory of mechanics. Divisibility and Porosity. 19. Divisibility is that property by virtue of which a body may be separated into parts. All bodies may be di- vided, and by successive divisions the fragments may be ren- dered very small. It is probable that all bodies are composed of ultimate atoms which are indivisible and indestructible ; if so, they must be exceedingly minute. There are micro- scopic beings so small that millions of them do not equal in bulk a single grain of sand, and yet these animalcules possess organs, blood, and the like. How inconceivably minute, then, must be the atoms of which these various parts are composed. Porosity is that property by virtue of which the particles of a body are more or less separated. The intermediate spaces are called pores. When the pores are small, the body is said to be dense ; when they are large, it is said to be rare. Gold is a dense body, air or steam a rare one. Compressibility, Dilatability, and Elasticity. 20. Compressibility, or contractility, is that property by virtue of which the particles of a body are susceptible of being brought nearer together, and dilatability is that prop- erty by virtue of which they may be separated to a greater distance. All bodies contract and expand Avhen their tem- peratures are changed. Atmospheric air is an example of a body which readily contracts and expands. Elasticity is that property by virtue of which a body tend* to resume its original form after compression, or extension. Steel and India rubber are instances of elastic bodies. No bodies are perfectly elastic, nor are any perfectly inelastic. The force which a body exerts in endeavoring to resume its 20 MECHANICS. form after distortion, is called the force of restitution. If we denote the force of distortion by <#, the force of restitu- tion by r, and their ratio by e, we shall have r in which e is called the modulus of elasticity. Those bodies are most elastic which give the greatest value for e. Glass is highly elastic, clay is very inelastic. Attraction, Repulsion, and Polarity. 2 1 . Attraction is that property by virtue of which one par- ticle has a tendency to pull others towards it. Repulsion is that property by virtue of which one particle tends to push others from it. The dissimilar poles of two magnets attract each other, whilst similar poles repel each other. It is sup- posed that forces of attraction and repulsion are continually exerted between the neighboring particles of bodies, and that the positions of these particles are continually changing, as these forces vary. Polarity is that property by virtue of which the attractive and repellent forces between the particles exert an arranging power, so as to give definite forms to masses. The phenom- ena of crystalization already referred to, depend upon this property. It is to polarity that many of the most interest- ing phenomena of physics are to be attributed. Equilibrium. 22. A system of forces is said to be in equilibrium when they mutually counteract each other's effects. If a system of forces in equilibrium be applied to a body, they will not change its state with respect to rest or motion ; if the body be at rest it will remain so, or if it be in motion, it will con- tinue to move uniformly, so far as these forces are concerned. The idea of an equilibrium of forces does not imply either rest or motion, but simply a continuance in the previous state, with respect to rest or motion. Hence two kinds of equilibrium are recognized ; the equilibrium of rest, called DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 21 statical equilibrium, and the equilibrium of motion, called dynamical equilibrium. If we observe that a body remains at rest, we infer that all the forces acting upon it are in equi- librium ; if we observe that a body moves uniformly, we in like manner infer that all the forces acting upon it are in equilibrium. Definition of Mechanics. 23. Mechanics is that science which treats of the laws of equilibrium and motion. That branch of it which treats of the laws of equilibrium is called statics ; that branch which treats of the laws of motion is call ed dynamics. When the bodies considered are liquids, of which water is a type, these two branches are called hydrostatics and hydrodynam- ics. When the bodies considered are gases, of which air is a type, these brandies are called aerostatics and aerody- namics. Measure of Forces. 24. We know nothing of the absolute nature of forces, and can only judge of them by their effects. We may, how- ever, compare these effects, and in so doing, we virtually compare the forces themselves. Forces may act to produce pressure, or to produce motion. In the former case, they are called forces of pressure y in the latter case, moving forces. There are two corresponding methods of measuring forces, first, by the pressure they can exert, secondly, by the quantities of motion which they can communicate. A force of pressure may be expressed in pounds; thus, a pressure of one pound is a force which, if directed vertically upwards, would just sustain a weight of one pound ; a pres- sure of two pounds is a force which would sustain a weight of two pounds, and so on. A moving force may be a single impulse, or it may be made up of a succession of impulses. The unit of an impulsive force, is an impulse which can cause a unit of mass to move over a unit of space in a unit of time. A force which can cause two units of mass to move over a unit of space in a unit of time, or which can cause a 22 MECHANICS. unit of mass to move over two units of space in a unit of time, is called a double force. A force which can cause three units of mass to move over a unit of space in a unit of time, or which can cause a unit of mass to move over three units of space in a unit of time, is called a triple force, and so on. If we represent a unit of force by 1, a double force will be represented by 2, a triple force by 3, and so on. In general, a force which can cause m units of mass to move over n units of space in a unit of time, will be repre- sented by m x n. Hence, forces may be compared with each other as readily as numbers, and by the same general rules. The unit of mass, the unit of space, and the unit of time, are altogether arbitrary, but having been once assumed they must remain the same throughout the same discussion. We shall assume a mass weighing one pound at the equator, as the unit of mass, one foot, as the unit of space, and one second, as the unit of time. Let us denote any impulsive force, by f the mass moved, by m, and the velocity which the impulse can impart to it by v. Then, since the velocity is the space passed over in one second, we shall have, from what precedes, f — mv. If we suppose m to be equal to 1, we shall have, /= V. That is, the measure of an impulse is the velocity which it ca?i impart to a unit of mass. An incessant force is made of a succession of impulses. It has been agreed to take, as the measure of an incessant force, the quantity of motion that it can generate in one second, or the unit of time. If we denote an incessant force by /, the mass moved by m, and the velocity generated in one second by v, we shall have, / = mv. DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 23 If we suppose m to be equal to 1, we shall have, / = ». That is, the measure of an incessant force is the velocity which it can generate in a unit of mass in a unit of time. If the force is of such a nature as to act equally upon every particle of a body, as gravity, for instance, the vel- ocity generated will be entirely independent of the mass. In these cases, the velocity that a force can generate in a unit of time, is called the acceleration due to the force. If we denote the acceleration hjf the mass acted upon by m, and the entire moving force hyf, we shall have, f ~ mf = mv. Since an incessant force is made up of a succession of im- pulses, its measure may be assimilated to that of an impul- sive force, so that both may be represented and treated in the same manner. Forces of pressure, if not counteracted, would produce motion ; and, as they differ in no other respect from the forces already considered, they also may be assimilated to impulsive forces, and treated in the same manner. Representation of Forces. 25. It has been found convenient in Mechanics to repre- sent forces by straight lines; this is readily effected by taking lines proportional to the forces which they repre- sent. Having assumed some definite straight line to repre- sent a unit of force, a double force will be represented by a line twice as long, a triple force by a line three times as long, and so on. A force is completely given when we have its intensity, its point of application, and the direction in which it acts. When a force is represented by a straight line, the length of the line represents the intensity, one extremity of the line represents the point » *~ of application, and the direction of the pig. 1. line represents the direction of the force. Thus, in figure 1, P represents the intensity, the point 24 MECHANICS. of application, and the direction from to P is the direction of the force. This direction is gen- erally indicated by an arrow head. g ^ It is to be observed that the point of Fig. 1. application of a force may be taken at any point of its line of direction, and it is often found convenient to transfer it from one point to another on this line. The intensity of a force may be represented analytically by a letter, which letter is usually the one placed at the ar- row head ; thus, in the example just given, we should desig- nate the force OP by the single letter P. If forces acting in any direction are regarded as positive, those acting in a contrary direction must be regarded as nega- tive. This convention enables us to apply the ordinary rules of analysis to the investigations of Mechanics. Forces situated in the same plane are generally referred to two rectangular axes, OX and Y, which are called co-ordinate axes. The direction from towards JTis that of positive abscissas ; that from towards X is that of negative ab- scissas. The directions from to- wards Y and Y\ respectively, are those of positive and negative ordi- nates. Forces acting in the direc- tions of positive abscissas and posi- tive ordinates are positive ; those acting in contrary directions, are negative. Forces in space are referred to three rectangular co-ordinate axes, OX, Y, and OZ. Forces acting from towards X, Y, or Z, are positive, those acting in contrary directions, are negative. Fi{ IY 7 Fig. 2. IZ . 3. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 25 CHAPTER II. COMPOSITION, RESOLUTION, AND EQUILIBRIUM OF FORCES. Composition of Forces whose directions coincide. 26. Composition of forces, is the operation of finding a single force whose effect is equivalent to that of two or more given forces. This single force is called the resultant of the given forces. Resolution of forces, is the operation of find- ing two or more forces whose united effect is equivalent to that of a given force. These forces are called components of the given force. If two forces are applied at the same point, and act in the same direction, their resultant is equal to the sum of the two forces. If they act in contrary directions, their resultant is equal to their difference, and acts in the direction of the greater one. In general, if any number of forces are ap- plied at the same point, some of which act in one direction, and the others in a contrary direction, their resultant i? equal to the sum of those which act in one direction, dimin- ished by that of those which act in the contrary direction • or, if we regard the rule for signs, the resultant is equal to the algebraic sum of the components ; the sign of this alge- braic sum makes known the direction in which the resultant acts. This principle follows immediately from the rule adopted for measuring forces. Thus, if the forces P, P', &c, applied at any point, act in the direction of positive abscissas, whilst the forces P", P'", &c, applied to the same point, act in the direction of nega- tive abscissas, then will their resultant, denoted by P, be given by the equation, R = (P + P' + etc.,) - (P" + P" + &c.) 2 26 MECHANICS. If the first term of the second member of this equation is numerically greater than the second, P is positive, which shows that the resultant acts in the direction of positive ab- scissas. If the first term is numerically less than the second, P is negative, which shows that the resultant acts in the direction of negative abscissas. If the two terms of the second member are numerically equal, P will reduce to 0. In this case, the forces will exact- ly counterbalance each other, and, consequently, will be in equilibrium. Whenever a system of forces is in equilibrium, their re- sultant must necessarily be equal to 0. "When all of the forces of the system are applied at the same point, this sin- gle condition will be sufficient to determine an equilibrium. All of the forces of a system which act in the general di- rection of the same straight line, are called homologous, and their algebraic sum may be expressed by writing the ex- pression for a single force, prefixing the symbol 2, a sym- bol which indicates the algebraic sum of several homologous quantities. We might, for example, write the preceding equation under the form, R = *{P) (1.) This equation expresses the fact, that the resultant of a sys- tem of forces, acting in the same direction, is equal to the algebraic sum of the forces. Parallelogram of Forces. 27. Let P and Q be two forces applied to the material point 0, taken as a unit of mass, and acting in the directions OP and OQ. q _ "R Let OP represent the velocity gener- / ^i ated by the force P, and OQ the ve- / /^ locity generated by the force Q. Draw Z^___— -w' PP parallel to OQ, and QE parallel to OP ; draw also the diagonal OP. ***• 4 From the law of inertia (Art 18), it follows that a mass acted upon by two simultaneous forces moves in the general COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. '2T direction of each, as though the other did not exist. Now, if we suppose the material point 0, to be acted upon simul- taneously by the two forces P and Q, it will, by virtue of the first, be found at the end of one second somewhere on the line PP ; and by virtue of the second somewhere on the line Qll ; hence, it will be at their point of intersection. But had the point been acted upon by a single force, rep- resented in. direction and intensity by OP, it would have moved from to P in the same time. Hence, the single force P is equivalent, in effect, to the aggregate of the two forces P and Q ; it is, therefore, their resultant. Hence, If two forces be represented in direction and intensity by the adjacent sides of a parallelogram, their resultant tcill be represented in direction and intensity by that diagonal of the parallelogram, which jxisses through their point of in- tersection. This principle is called the parallelogram of forces. In the preceding demonstration we have only considered moving forces, but the principle is equally true for forces of pressure ; for, if we suppose a force equal and directly op- posed to the resultant P, this force will be in equilibrium with the forces P and Q, which will then become forces of pressure. The relation between the forces will not be changed by this hypothesis, and we may therefore enunciate the principle as follows : If two pressures be represented in direction and intensity by the adjacent sides of a parcdlelogrcmi, their resultant icill be rep/resented in direction and intensity by that diago- nal of the parallelogram which passes through their com mon point. This principle is called the parallelogram of pressures. Hence, we see that moving forces and pressw-es may be compounded and resolved according to the same principles, and by the same general laws. Parallelopipedon of Forces. 28. Let P, Q, and S represent three forces applied to the same point, and not in the same plane. Upon these lines, 28 MECHANICS. as ed&is* , onstruct the parallelopipedon OH, and draw 0JS1 and Ssi. From the preceding article, OM represents the resultant of P and Q, and from the same article, OH rep- resents the resultant of 031 and S. Hence, OH is the resultant of the three forces P, Q, and S. That is, if three forces be represented in direc- tion and intensity by three adjacent edges of a parallelopipedon, their resultant will be repre- sented by that diagonal of the p>arcdlelopipedon which passes through their point of intersection. This principle is known as the parallelopipedon of forces, and is equally true for moving forces and pressures. Geometrical Composition and Resolution of Forces. 29. The following constructions depend upon the prin- ciple of the parallelogram of forces. 1. Having given the directions and intensities of two forces applied at the same point, to find the direction and in- tensity of their resultant. Let OP and OQ represent the given forces, and their point of ap- plication; draw PH parallel to OQ, and QH parallel to OP, and draw the diagonal OH ; it will be the re- sultant sought. 2. Having given the direction and intensity of the result- ant of two forces, and the direction and intensity of one of its components, to find the direction and intensity of the other component. Let H be the given resultant, P the given component, and their point of application ; drawiiP, and through draw OQ parallel to HP, also through H draw HQ parallel to P 0\ then will OQ be the component sought. 3. Having given the direction and intensity of the result- ant of two forces, and the directions of the two components, to find the intensities of the components. T\z. 6. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 29 Let P be the given resultant, OP and OQ the directions of the compo- nents, and their point of applica- tion. Through P draw PP and PQ respectively, parallel to Q and P 0, then will OP and OQ represent the intensities of the com- ponents. From this construction it is evident that any force may be resolved into two components having any direction what- ever ; these, again may each be resolved into new compo- nents, and so on ; hence it follows that a single force may be resolved into any number of components having any as- sumed directions whatever. 4. Having given the direction and intensity of the re- sultant of two forces, and the intensities of the components, to find their directions. Let P be the given resultant, and its point of application. With P as a centre, and one of the compo- nents as a radius, describe an arc of a circle ; with as a centre, and the other component as a radius, describe a second arc cutting the first at P ; draw PP and P 0, and complete the parallelogram PQ, then will OP and OQ be the directions sought. 5. To find the resultant of any number of forces, P, Q, JS t T, &c, lying in the same plane, and applied at the same point. Construct the resultant P' of P and Q, then construct the re- sultant P" of P' and £, then the resultant P of P" and T, and so on: the final resultant will be the result- ant of the system. By inspecting the preceding fig- ure, we see that in the polygon OQ P'P"PT, the side QP' is equal and parallel to the force P, the side R'P" to the force JS, and the side P"P to the force T, j V. V Fig. 9. 30 MECHANICS. and so on. Hence, we may construct the resultant of such a system of forces by drawing through the second extremity of the first force, a line parallel and equal to the second force, through the second extremity of this line, a line par- allel and equal to the third force, and so on to the last. The line drawn from the starting point to the last extremity of the last line drawn, will represent the resultant sought. If the last extremity of the last force fall at the starting point, the resultant will be 0, and the system will be in equili- brium. This principle is called the polygon of forces ; its simplest case is the triangle of forces. Components of a Force in the direction of two axes. 30. To find expressions for the components of a force which act in directions parallel to two rectangular axes. Let OX and OY be Y jr r two such axes, and II any force lying in their plane; construct the compo- nents parallel to OX and Y, as be- - fore explained, and denote the angle LAB., which the force makes with the ,,. 1f , r lg. 10. axis of JT, by a. From the figure, we have, AL = R cos a, and BL — AM — II sin a ; or, making AL = X, and A 31 r= Y, we have, X = B cos a, and Y = II sin a . . (2.) The angle a is estimated from the direction of positive abscissas around to the left through 360°. For all values of a from 0° to 90°, and from 270° to 360°, the cosine of a will be positive, and, consequently, the com- ponent ylXwill be positive; that is, it will act in the direction of positive abscissas. For all values of a from 90° to 270°, the cosine of « will be negative, and the component AL will act in the direction of negative abscissas. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 3i Pig. 10. For all values of a from 0° to 180°, the sine of a will be positive, and the component AM will be positive ; that is, it will act in the direction of positive ordinates. For all values of a from 180° to 360°, the sine of a will be negative, and the compo- "~ nent A3I will act in the direction of negative ordinates. For a = 90°, or a = 270°, we shall have AL = 0. For a = 0, or a = 180°, we shall have AM = o. If we regard AL and A3fns two given forces, R will be their resultant ; and since RL = A3f, we shall have from the figure, R = ^Tx^r-T* .... (3.) Hence, the resultant of any two forces, at right-angles to each other, is equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of the two forces. From the figure, we also have, cos a R' and sin a = -= Y R Hence, the resultant is completely determined. PRACTICAL EXAMPLES.. 1. Two pressures of 9 and 12 pounds, respectively, act upon a point, and at right-angles to each other. Required, the direction and intensity of the resultant pressure. We have, X= 9, and T= 12; 5 -'i SOLUTION. Also, COS a R= V81~+ 144 - 15. a = 53° r 47." That is, the resultant pressure is 15 lbs., and it makes an angle of 53° 7' 47" with the direction of the first force. 2. Two forces are to each other as 3 is to 4, and their 32 MECHANICS. resultant is 20 lbs. What are the intensities of the compo- nents ? SOLUTION. We have, 3Y=4X, or F= f-XJ and R = 20; .-. 20 = y^X 2 + ^X* = f A 7 "; Hence, JT = 12, and F= 16. 3. A boat fastened by a rope to a point on the shore, is urged by the wind perpendicular to the current, with a force of 18 pounds, and down the current by a force of 22 pounds. What is the tension, or strain, upon the rope, and what angle does it make with the current ? SOLUTION. We have X = 22, and T = 18 ; .'. R = V808 = 28.425 ; Also, cos a = 99 28.425 39° 17' 20". Hence the tension is 28.425 lbs., and the angle 39° W 20". Components of a Force in the direction of three axes. 31. To find expressions for the components of a force ia the directions of three rectangu- lar axes. Let OR represent the force, and OX, OT, and OZ, three rectangular axes drawn through its point of application, O. Construct a parallelopipedon on OR as a diagonal, having three of its edges coinciding with the axes. Then will the lines OX, OM, and OX, represent the required components. Denote these components, re- spectively, by X, Y, and Z. Draw lines from R, to X, 31, and 7r* /r Fie. 11. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 33 3r x Fig. 1L N, respectively ; these will be perpendicular to the axes, and with them, and the force i?, will form three right-angled triangles. Denote the angle between JR and the axis of JC by a, that between H and the axis of y by /3, and that between 11 and the axis of Z by 7 ; we shall have from the right-angled triangles referred to, the follow- ing equations : JC = JR cos a, Y = R cos /3, and Z = R cos 7. The angles a, /3, and 7, are estimated from the directions of the positive co-ordinates, through 360°. The components above found will be positive when they act in the direction of positive co-ordinates, and negative when they act in a contrary direction. If we regard J5T, Y, and Z, as three forces, R will be their resultant, and we shall have, from a known property of the rectangular parallelopipedon, R = ^X % + Y* + Z* (4.) That is, the resultant of three forces at right angles to each other, is equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of the components. We also have from the figure, cos X a Y a Z a, = — , cos ,0 = -^, and cos 7 = - 7> . Hence, the position of the resultant is completely determined. EXAM PLE 1. Required the intensity and direction of the resultant of three fo^es at right angles to each pther, having the in- tensities 4, 0, and 6 pounds, respectively. 2* '64 MECHANICS. SOLUTION We have, X =4, Y= 5, and Z = 6. .'. E = y/Tl— 8.775. Also, cos a = - 4 -- , cos p = JL , and cos y = - 6 f 5 ; whence, n= 62°52'51", = 55° 15 '50", and 7 = 46°51'43". Hence the resultant pressure is 8.775 lbs., and it makes, with the components taken in order, angles equal to 62° 52' 51", 55° 15' 50", and 46° 51' 43". 2. Three forces at right angles are to each other as the numbers 2, 3, and 4, and their resultant is 60 lbs. What are the intensities of the forces ? SOLUTION. We have Y = f X, Z = 2X, and B = 60 ; Hence, 60 = V^rTfTTIP - £X\ , Q\ 3'\ > sin (? - a ) = TTTh and sin fa + • /3 ) 0(7 06" 00 Substituting in the preceding equation, and reducing, we have, Er=Qq + Pp. When the point C fills within the angle POB, 9 — a becomes negative, and the equation just deduced becomes Br=Qq- Pp. 42 MECHANICS. Hence, we conclude in all cases, that the moment of the resultant of two forces is equal to the algebraic sum of the moments of the forces taken separately. If we regard the force Q as the resultant of two others, and one of these in turn, as the resultant of two others, and so on, the principle may be extended to any number of forces lying in the same plane, and applied at the same point. This principle may, in the general case, be expressed by the equation I?r = 2(Pp) (9.) That is, the moment of the resultant of any number of forces, lying in the same plane, and applied at the same, point, is equal to the algebraic sum of the moments of the forces taken separately. This is called the principle of moments. The moment of the resultant is called the resultant mo- ment ; the moments of the components are called compo- nent moments / and the plane passing through the resultant and centre of moments, is WiZ plane of moments. When a force tends to turn its point of application about the centre of moments, in the direction of the motion of the hands of a watch, its moment is considered positive ; consequently, when it tends to produce rotation in a contrary direction, the moment must be negative. If the resultant moment is negative, the tendency oi the system is to pro- duce rotation in a negative direction about the centre of moments. If the resultant moment is 0, there is no ten- dency to produce rotation in the system. The resultant moment may become 0, either in consequence of the lever arm becoming 0, or in consequence of the resultant itself being equal to 0. In the former case, the centre of mo- ments lies upon the direction of the resultant, and the nu- merical value of the sum of the moments of the forces which tend to produce rotation in one direction, is equal to that of those which tend to produce motion in a contrary direction. In the latter case, the system of forces is in equilibrium. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 43 Moments, with respect to an Axis. 37. To- form an idea of the moment of a force with respect to a straight line, taken as an axis of moments. Let P represent any force, and let the axis of Z be assumed so as to coincide with the axis of mo- ments. Draw the straight line AB perpendicular, both to the direction of the force and to the axis of moments ; at the pomt Fig. 16. A, in which this perpendicular intersects the direction of the force, let the force P be resolved into two components, P" and P' , the first parallel to the axis of Z, and the second at right angles to it. The former will have no tendency to produce rotation, the latter will tend to produce rotation, which tendency will be mea- sured by P' x AB\ this product is the moment of the force P with respect to the axis of moments, and is evi- dently equal to the moment of the projection of the force upon a plane at right-angles to the axis, taken with respect to the point in which this axis pierces the plane as a centre of moments. If there are any number of forces situated in any manner in space, it is clear from the preceding principles that their resultant moment, with respect to any straight line taken as an axis of moments, is equal to the algebraic sum of the component moments icith respect to the same axis. Principle of Virtual Moments. 38. Let P represent a force applied to the material point ; let the point be moved by an extraneous force to some position, p' O p jp O, very near to ; project the path £'' *'g OC upon the direction of the force; Fig. 17. the projection Op, or Op\ is called the virtual velocity of the force, and is taken positively when it falls upon the direction of the force, as Op, and nega- 44 MECHANICS. tively when it falls upon the prolongation of the force, as Op'. The product obtained by multiplying any force by its virtual velocity is called the virtual moment of the force Assume the figure and nota- tion of Article 36. Op, Oq, and Or are the virtual velocities of _ Jf" ~~s the forces P, §, and R. Let us denote the virtual velocity of o°^ any force by the symbol of va- riation 8, followed by a small letter of the same name as that which designates the force. We have from the figure, as in Article 36, the relations, R = P cos a. + Q cos (3. = P sin a — Q sin (3. Multiplying both members of the first by cos 9, and of the second by sin 9, and adding the resultant equations, we have, R cos 9 = P (cos a cos 9 4- sin a sin 9) 4 Q (cos 9 cos (3 — sin 9 sin (3). Or, by reduction, ^ R cos 9 = P cos (9 — a) 4- Q cos (9 4- (3). But, from the right-angled triangles COp, COq, and COr, we have, cos 9 = -0^, cos (9 — a) = —-, and cos (9 + P) - ^\ Substituting these in the preceding equation, and reducing, we have, JRSr = JPSp + Q8q. Hence, the virtual moment of the resultant of two forces, is equal to the algebraic sum of the virtual moments of t/ie two forces taken separately. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 45 If we regard the force Q as the resultant of two other forces, and one of these as the resultant of two others, and so on, the principle maybe extended to any number offerees, applied at the same point. This principle may be expressed by the following equation : JRor = 2 (JPSp) .... (10.) Hence, the virtual moment of the resultant of any num- ber of forces applied at the same point, is equal to the alge- braic sum of the virtual moments of the forces taken sepa- rately. This is called the principle of virtual moments. If the resultant is equal to 0, the system is in equilibrium, and the algebraic sum of the virtual moments is equal to ; con- versely, if the algebraic sum of the virtual moments of the forces is equal to 0, the resultant is also equal to 0, and the forces are in equilibrium. This principle, and the preceding one, are much used in discussing the subject of machines. Resultant of parallel Forces. 39. Let P and Q be two forces lying in the same plane, and applied at points invariably connected, for example, at the points 31 and JST of a solid body. -^ v Their lines of direction being pro- ^^\— ^9. longed, will meet at some point ftor <^Li_ \ p ; and if we suppose the points ^t of application to be transferred to Fig- i» 0, their resultant may be deter- mined by the parallelogram of forces. The direction of the resultant will pass through O. (Art. 2V.) Whether the forces be transferred to or not, the direction of the resul- tant will always pass through O, and this whatever may be the value of the included angle. Xow, supposing the points of application to be at M and jV, let the force Q be turned about JV as an axis. As it approaches parallelism with P, 46 MECHANICS. the point will recede from Maud iVJ and the resultant will also approach parallelism with P. Finally, when Q becomes parallel to P, the point will be at an infinite distance from M and JV, and the resultant will also be par- ,,^' allel to P and Q. In any position °^~ of P and Qi the value of the re- sultant, denoted by H, will be given by the equation (Art. 36), P — Pcosa -f Qcosfi. When the forces are parallel, and lying in the same direc- tion, we shall have a — 0, and /3 = 0; or, cos a = 1, and cos [3 = 1. Hence, It = P + Q. If the forces lie in opposite directions, we shall have a — 0, and /3 = 180°; or, cos a = 1, and cos (3 — — 1. Hence, s'' ^N, P = P- Q. That is, ?Ae resultant of ttco qU. -^ parallel forces is equal in inten- Qr-l L V- «7y to £/*e algebraic sum of the M forces, and its line of direction Fi s 20 - is par allel to that of the two forces. If we regard Q as the resultant of two parallel forces, and one of these as the resultant of two others, and so on, the principle may be extended to any number of parallel forces. Denoting the resultant of a group of parallel forces, J\ P\ P", &c, by P, we have, * = 2(P) (11.; That is, the resultant of a group of parallel forces is equal in intensity to the algebraic sum of the forces. Ps line of direction is also par 'allel to that of the given forces. No_ ^Q 9/ ' C / . ... i -^2 L COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 47 Point of Application of the Resultant. 40. Let P and Q be two parallel forces, and R their resultant. Let M and JV be the points of application of the two forces, and S the point in which the direction of P cuts the line MN. K^ Through JV draw JSTZ per- Fi 2 pendicular to the general di- rection of the forces, and assume the point (7, in which it intersects the line of direc- tion of P. as a centre of ino- ST . ft-* 7? nients. Since the centre of / ; ... „ -My ! >-i? moments is on the line of / [L direction of the resultant, So l i — >_j», the lever arm of the resultant will be 0, and we shall have, from the principle of moments (Art. 36), C Fig. Px CZ= Q x CM, or, P : Q : : CJV : CZ. But, from the similar triangles CJS T S and ZNM, we have, CJST: CZ : : 8HT : SM. Combining the two proportions, we have, P : Q : : SJST : SM. That is, the line of direction of the resultant divides the line joining the points of application of the components, inversely as the components. From the last proportion, we have, by composition, P : Q : P+ Q : : SIT: 8M: SJV + SM; and, by division, P : Q : P - Q : : SJST • SM : S2T- SM. 48 MECHANICS. When the forces act in the same direction, P + Q will be their resultant, and SN -f SM will equal MN. Since P + Q is greater than either P or Q, MN will be greater than either SN or SM, which shows that the resultant lies between the components. When the forces act in contrary directions, P — Q will be their resultant, and SN — SM will equal MN Since P — Q is less than P (supposed the greater of the compo- nents), MN will be less than SN, which shows that the resultant lies without both components, and on the side of the greater. Substituting in the preceding proportions, for P -f- §, P- Q, SN + SM, and SN — S3I, their values, we have, P : (2 : E : : ^ : SM : JOE . . . (8)'. That is, of two parallel forces and their resultant, each is proportional to the distance between the other two. H « 31 Fig. 23. -Si" Geometrical Composition and Resolution of Parallel Forces. 41. The preceding principles give rise to the following geometrical constructions : /jp* 1. To find the resultant of two parallel forces lying in the same direc- tion : Let P and Q be the forces, M and N their points of application. Make MQ' = Ci * n<1 #2* = 7> ; draw P'C'i cutting JAV in S ; through £ draw SP parallel to MP, and make it equal to P + Q: it will be the resultant. For, from the similar triangles P'SN and Q'SM, we have, PN : Q'M : : SN : SM; or, P : # : : £iV : £JSf. After the construction is made, the distances MS and NS may be measured by a scale of equal parts. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 49 EXAMPLE. Given P = 9 lbs, Q = 6 lbs., and JOT = 30 in. Re- quired MS. We have P = 15, hence, 15 : 6 : : 30 : J/# ; .-. Jf/S = 12 in. -4ws. 2. To find the resultant of two parallel forces acting in opposite directions: Let P and Q be the forces, M and N their points of application. Prolong QNxS&NA = P, and make MB = Q; draw AP, and produce it till it cuts NM produced in S ; draw SP parallel to MP, and make it equal to BP, it will be the resultant required. For from the similar triangles SNA and SMP, we have, AN : P3I : : SN : S3I; or, P : Q EXAMPLE. Given P = 20 lbs., Q = 8 lbs., and _#3f = 18 in. Required #2^ We have i? = 20 — 8 = 12; hence, from Proportion (8)! 12 : 20 : : 18 : SN: .'. SN = 30 in. Ans. /B 3fr- T—& 3. To resolve a given force into two parallel components lying in the same direction, and applied at given points : Let P be the given force, M and N the given points of application. Through M and N draw lines parallel to P. Make MA = P, and draw AN, cutting P in P ; make MP — SP and NQ = i?/?; they will be the required components. 3 n / Fig. 2.-V 50 MECHANICS. For, from the similar triangles AMX and BSX y ■ 7" B ;q Fig. 25. Re- J?£: AM: : SIT: MX ; or, J5S : i2 : : £^T : J/^ But, from Proportion (8)', we have, P : B : : SA" : 3IX; .-. .££ ^ P, and BR = §. EXAMPLE. Given i2 = 24 lbs., S3I = V in., and SX = 5 in. quired P and §. From Proportion (8), we have, 12 : 7 : : 24 : Q ; .-. g = 14 lbs. 12 : 5 : : 24 : P ; .-. P = 10 lbs. 4. To resolve a given force into parallel components lying in opposite directions, and applied at given points. Both points of application must lie on the same side of the given force. Let B bo. the given force, M and X the given points of application. Through M and A 7 " draw lines parallel to B ; make XB — B, and draw B3I; through S, draw >S'J. parallel to MB; then will XA and BA be equal to the in- tensities of the components. Make MP = AN, and XQ = AB, and they will be the components. For, from the triangles ASX, and BMX, we have, ^""Ifr ] g.26 AX : BN : : SX: 3fX; or, AX : B : : SX : J/iV 7 : But, from Proportion (8)', we have, P : B : : SX: 3IX; /. AX = P, and AB = Q. COMPOSITION AND RESOLUTION OF FORCES. 51 r 4<1 F p- EX AMPLE. Given R = 24 lbs., SJST = 18 in., and SM = 9 in. Re- quired P and §. From Proportion (8)', we have, P : 24 : : 18 : 9 ; .\ P = 48 lbs. § : 24 : : 9:9; /. § = 24 lbs. R = P - Q = 24 lbs. 5. To find the resultant of any number of parallel forces. Let P, P', P", P'", be such a system of forces. Find the resultant of P and P\ by the rule already given, it will be R' = P + P' ; find the resultant of P' and P', it will be R" = P + P + P" ; find the resultant of P" and P'", it will be R = P + P + P" + P". If there is a greater number of forces, the operation of composition may be con- tinued ; the final result will be the re- sultant of the system. If some of the forces act in contrary directions, combine all which act in one direction, as just explained, and call their resultant R'; then combine all those which act in a contrary direction, ind call their resultant R" ; finally, combine R' and R" by a preceding rule ; their resultant R will be the resultant of the system. If R' — R", the resultant will be 0, and its point of ap- plication will be at an infinite distance. In this case, the forces reduce to a couple, the efiect of which is simply to pro- duce rotation. Lever Arm of the Resultant. 42. Let P, P', P", ' + &c. ; Hence, £Ae lever arm of the resultant of a system of par- allel forces, with respect to an axis at right-angles to their direction, is equal to the algebraic sum of the moments of the forces divided by the algebraic sum of the forces. Centre of Parallel Forces. 43. Let there be any number of forces, P, P, P', y ; « ,y II we denote the angles which the resultant makes with the axes of AT and Y by a and & respectively, we shall have, as in Article 33, AT Y cosa = ^, cos b — -= . . . (18.) Equations (16) and (17) make known the point of applica- tion, and Equations (18) make known its direction ; hence, the resultant is completely determined. To find the moment of P, with respect to O as a centre of moments, let us denote its lever arm by r, and the lever arms of P, P', P", &c, with respect to 0, byjfl, p\ p", &c. The moment of the force Pcosa, is Pcosa y, and that of the force PcosS, is — Pcosfix. The negative sign is given to the last result, because the forces Pcos->. and Pcos/3 tend to turn the system in contrary directions. From the principle of moments (Art. 36), the moment of P is equal to the algebraic sum of the moments of its com- ponents. Hence, Pp — Pcosa y — PcosQ x. In like manner, the moments of the other component forces may be found. Because the moment of the resultant is equal to the algebraic sum of the moments of all its com- ponents (Art. 36), we have, Br = 2(Pp) = 2 (Pcosa y - Pcos.3 x) . (19.) r>rPcosa 56 MECHANICS. Resultant of a Group of Forces situated in Space, and applied at points invariably connected. 45. Let P, P\ P", The values of JT, I 7 ^ and Z, may be computed by means of Equations (20), and these being substituted in (21), make known the value of the resultant. The co-ordinates of its point of application result from Equations (22), and its line of direction is shown by Equations (23). The intensity, direction, and point of application being known, the resul- tant is completely determined. 3* 58 MECHANICS. Measure of the tendency to Rotation about the Axes. 46. Let A", Y, and Z denote the components of the resultant of the system, as in the last article, and denote, as « before, the co-ordinates of the point of application of the re- sultant by «!, y 1? and z v To find the resultant moment, with re- spect to the axis of Z, it may be observed that the component -%/—■ yY Z, can produce no rotary effect, y x since it is parallel to the axis of Fig. 30. Z ; the moment of the compo- nent Y, with respect to the axis of Z, is Yx x ; the moment of the component A", with respect to the same axis, is — JEy 15 the negative sign being taken because the force AT tends to produce rotation in a negative direction. Hence, the resultant moment of the system, with respect to the axis of Z, is, Yx x - X Vl - or, substituting for AT and Y their values, we have, Yx 1 - Xy l = 2{T>cos3x- Pcosay) . (24.) In like manner for the resultant moment of the system, with respect to the axis X, Zy l — Is, — 2(Pcos7?/ — Pcos/3 z) . ( 25.) And for the resultant moment, with respect to the axis of r, JTz, — Zx 1 = 2(Pcosas — Pcosyx) . (26.) Equilibrium of Forces in a Plane. 4 7. Tn order that a system of forces lying in the same plane, and applied at points of a free solid, may be in equilibrium, two conditions must be fulfilled: First, the resultant of the system must have no tendency to produce EQUILIBRIUM OF FORCES. 59 motion of translation ; and, secondly, it must have no tendency to produce motion of rotation. Conversely, if these conditions are satisfied, the system will be in equi- librium. The first condition will be fulfilled, and will only be ful- filled, when the resultant is equal to ; but from Art. 44, we have, e = v'x 2 + 3F. The value of B can only be equal to when X — 0, and Y = ; or, what is the same thing, 2(Pcos«) = 0, and 2(Pcos/3) = . (27.) The second condition will be fulfilled, and will only be fulfilled, when the moment of the resultant, with respect to any point of the plane, is equal to 0, whence, Br = 0; or, Z(Pp) = . . . (28.; Hence, from Equations (27) and (28), in order that a system of forces, lying in the same plane, and applied at points of a free solid body, may be in equilibrium, we must have, 1st. The algebraic sum of the components of the forces in the direction of any two rectangular axes separately equal to 0. 2d. The algebraic sum of the moments of the forces, with respect to any point in the plane, equal to 0. Equilibrium of Forces in Space. 48. In order that a system of forces situated in any man- ner in space, and applied at points of a free solid body, may be in equilibrium, two conditions must be fulfilled. First, the forces must have no tendency to produce motion of transla- tion ; and secondly, they must have no tendency to produce motion of rotation about either of the three rectangular axes. Conversely, when these conditions are fulfilled, the system will be in equilibrium. The first condition will be 60 MECHANICS. fulfilled, and will only be fulfilled, when the resultant is equal to 0. But, from Equation (21), That this value of it may be 0, we must have, separately, X = 0, Y= 0, and Z = ; or, what is the same thing, 2(Pcosa) =0, 2(Pcos.3) = 0, and2(Pcosy) = . (29.) The second condition will be fulfilled, and will only be fulfilled, when the moments, with respect to each of the three axes, are separately equal to 0. This gives (Art. 46), 2(Pcos,o x — Pcosa y) = " 2(Pcos/y - Pcos3z) = I • • (30.) 2(Pcosa z — Pcos/ x) = J Hence (Equations 29 and 30), in order that a system ot forces in space applied at points of a free solid may be in equilibrium : 1st. TJie algebraic sum, of the components of the forces in the direction of any three rectangular axes must be separate- ly equal to 0. 2d. TJie algebraic sum of the moments of the forces, with respect to any three rectangular axes, must be separately equal to 0. Equilibrium of Forces applied to a Revolving Body. 49. If a body is restrained by a fixed axis, about which it is free to revolve, we may take this line as the axis of AT. Since the axis is fixed, there can be no motion of transla- tion, neither ran there be any rotation about either of the Other two axes of co-ordinates. All of Equations (29), and the first and third of Equations (30), will be satisfied bj virtue of the connection of the body with the fixed axi* EQUILIBRIUM OF FORCES. 61 The second of Equations (30) is, therefore, the only one that must be satisfied by the relation between the forces. We must have, therefore, l(Fcosyy — Pcos,3 z) = . . (31.) That is, if a body is restrained by a fixed axis, the forces applied to it will be in equilibrium when the algebraic sum of the moments of the forces with respect to this axis is §qual to 0. 62 MECHANICS. CHAPTER III. CENTRE OF GRAVITY AXI) STABILITY. Weight. 50. That force by virtue of which a body, when aban- doned to itself, falls towards the earth, is called the force of gravity. The force of gravity acts upon every particle of a body, and, if resisted, gives rise to a pressure; this pressure is called the weight of the particle. The resultant weight of all the particles of a body is called the weight of the body. The weights of the particles are sensibly directed towards the centre of the earth ; but this point being nearly 4,000 miles from the surface, we may, for all practical pur- poses, regard these weights as parallel forces ; hence, the weight of a body acts in the same direction as the weights of its elementary particles, and is equal to their sum. Centre of Gravity. 51. The centre of gravity of a body is the point of ap- plication of its weight. The weight being the resultant of a system of parallel forces, the centre of gravity is a centre of parallel forces, and so long as the relative position of the particles remains unchanged, this point will retain a fixed position in the body, and this independently of any parti- cular position of the body (Art. 43). The position of the centre of gravity is entirely independent of the value of the force of gravity, provided that Ave regard this force as con- stant throughout the dimensions of the body, which we may do in all practical cases. Hence, the centre of gravity is the same for the same body, wherever it may be situated. The determination of the centre of gravity is, then, reduced to the determination of the centre of a system of parallel CENTKE OF GRAVITT. 63 forces. Equations (13) are, therefore, immediately appli- plicable. Preliminary discussion. 52. Let there be any number of weights applied at points of a straight line. We may take the axis of X. to coincide with this line, and because the points of application of the weights are on this line, we shall have, V — °5 y' — 0? & c - > z — 0, z' — 0, &g. ; substituting these in the second and third of Equations (13), we have, y x — 0, and Sj = 0. Hence, the point of application of the resultant is on the given line. In the case of a material straight line, that is, of a line made up of material points, the weight of each point will be applied at that point, and from what has just been shown, the point of application of the resultant weight will also be on the line ; but this point is the centre of gravity of the line. Hence, the centre of gravity of a material straight line is situated somewhere on the line. Let weights be applied at points of a given plane. We may take the plane XY to coincide with this plane, and in this case we shall have, z = 0, z' ~ 0, &c. ; these in the third of Equations (13) will give, Si = 0; hence, the point of application of the resultant iceights is in the plane. It may be shown, as before, that the centre of gravity of lane, the centre of gravity of the surface, or volume, lies in that plane. If a surface, or volume, has three diametral planes intersecting each other in a point, that point is the centre of gravity. Hence, the centre of gravity of the sphere and the ellipsoid lie at their centres. We see, also, that the centre of gravity of a surface, or volume, of revolution lies in the axis of revolution. Centre of Gravity of a Triangle. 55. Let ABC be any plane triang'e. Join the vertex A with the middle point D of the op- posite side B C ; then will AD bisect -A- all of the lines drawn in the triangle /l\ parallel to the base BC; hence, the T./ ; \ centre of gravity of the triangle lies / \ 7?. \ upon AD (Art. 54) ; for a like reason, » r :" : ss??£::::'-i«A the centre of gravity of the triangle D o Fi" 34. lies upon the line BE, drawn from the vertex B to the middle point of the opposite side AC ; it is, therefore, at G, their point of intersection. 66 MECHANICS. Draw ED ; then, since ED bisects A C and B (7, it ib parallel to AB, and the triangles EGD and AGB are similar. The f side ED is equal to one-half of its / \ \ homologous side ^4_Z?, consequently %^ / \ the side GD is equal to one-half of /..h\t~--^\ its homologous side AG ; that is, the C ^" ^ ^ b point G is one-third of the distance Fig . 34. from D to ^4. Hence, the centre of gravity of a plane triangle is on a line drawn from the vertex to the middle point of the base, and at one-third of the distance from the base to the vertex. Centre of Gravity of a Parallelogram. 56. Let A C be any parallelogram. Draw EF bisect- ing the sides A B and CD ; it will also bisect all lines of the parallelo- J) E C gram parallel to these sides ; hence, the / ^i centre of gravity lies on it ; draw also / T the line Oil bisecting the sides AD j- =£— and BC; for a similar reason, the Fig. 35. centre of gravity lies on it : it is, therefore, at (r, their point of intersection. Hence, the centre of gravity of a parallelogram lies at the point of intersection of two straight lines joining the middle points of the opposite sides. It is to be remarked, that this point coincides with the point of intersection of the diagonals of the parallelogram. Centre of Gravity of a Trapezoid. 57. Let AC be a trapezoid. Join the middle points, and I\ of the parallel sides, by a straight line ; this line will bisect all -JJl lines parallel to AB and DC\ hence, it must contain the centre of gravity. Draw the diagonal BI), dividing the trapezoid into two triangles. Draw also the lines DO and BP\ take CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 67 OQ = \OD, and PB = ±PB ; then will Q and B be the centres of gravity of these triangles (Art. 55). Join Q and B by a straight line ; the centre of gravity of the trapezoid must be on this line (Art. 52). Hence, it is at G where the line QB cuts OP. Centre of Gravity of a Polygon. 58. Let ABODE be any polygon, and «, 6, c, <7, e, the middle points of its sides. The weights of the sides will be proportional to their lengths, and may be represented by them. Let it first be required to find the centre of gravity of the peri- meter ; join a and b, and find a point o, such that ao : ob : : BO : BA; then will o be the centre of gravity of the sides AB and B O. Join o and c, and find a point o', such that oo o e CD : AB + BC\ then will o' be the centre of gravity of the three sides, AB, B (7, and OD. Join o' with d, and proceed as before, continuing the operation till the last point, G, is found ; this will be the centre of gravity of the perimeter. To find the centre of gravity of the area, divide it into the least number of triangles possible, and find the centre of gravity of each triangle. The weights of these triangles will be proportional to their areas, and may be represented by them. (Art. 52*.) Let ABODE A he any polygon, aud 0, 0\ 0", the centres of gravity of the triangles into which it can be divided. Join and 0\ and find a point 0"\ such that O'O' 00"' ABO : AOD; Fig. 8S. 68 MKCIIANICS. then will 0'" be the centre of grav- ity of the two triangles ABC and A CD. A Join 0" and 0'", and find a point G, such that Fig. 38. 0"'G : 0"G : : ABE : ABC + ACD; then will G be the centre of gravity of the given polygon. Every curvilinear area may be regarded as polygonal, the number of sides being very great. Hence, the centres of gravity of their perimeters and areas may be found by the methods given. Centre of Gravity of a Pyramid. 59« Any triangular pyramid may be regarded as made up of infinitely thin layers parallel to either of its faces. If a straight line be drawn from either vertex to the centre of gravity of the opposite face, it will pass through the centres of gravity of all the layers parallel to that face. We may regard the weight of each layer as being applied at its cen- tre of gravity, that is, at a point of this line ; hence, the centre of gravity of the pyramid is on this line (Art. 52). Let AB CD be a pyramid, and K the middle point of DC. Draw KB and KA, and lay- off KO = ±KB, and KO' = \KA. Then will be the centre of gravity of the face DB C, and 0' that of the face CAD. Draw A and BO' in- tersecting in G. Because the centre of gravity of the pyramid is upon both A and B 0', it is at their intersection G. Draw 00'; then KO and KO' being respectively third parts of KB and KA, 0' is parallel to AB, and the triangles OGO and AGB are similar, consequently CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 69 their homologous sides are proportional. But 00' is one- third of AJB, consequently OG is one-third of GA, or one- fourth of AO. Hence, the centre of gravity of a triangular pyramid is on a line drawn from its vertex to the centre of gravity of its base, and at one-fourth of the distance from the base to the vertex. Either face of a triangular pyramid may be taken as the base, the opposite vertex being considered as the vertex of the pyramid. To find the centre of gravity of a polygonal pyramid ; let A-BCDEF, represent any pyramid, A being the ver- tex. Conceive it divided into tri- angular pyramids, having a common vertex at A. If a plane be passed parallel to the base, and at one-fourth of the distance from the base to the vertex, it follows, from what has just been shown, that the centres of gravi- ty of all the partial pyramids will lie in this plane. We may regard each pyramid as having its weight concen- trated at its centre of gravity ; hence, the centre of gravity of the entire pyramid must lie in this plane (Art. 52). But it may be shown, as in the case of the triangular pyramid, that the centre of gravity lies somewhere in the line drawn from the vertex to the centre of gravity of the base ; it must, therefore, lie where this line pierces the auxiliary plane : Hence, the centre of gravity of any pyramid whatever lies on a line drawn from its vertex to the centre of gravity of its base, and at one-fourth of the distance from the base to the vertex. A cone is a pyramid having an infinite number of faces : Hence, the centre of gravity of a cone is on a line drawn from the vertex to the centre of gravity of the base, and at one-fourth of the distance from the base to the vertex. 70 MECHANICS. Centre of Gravity of Prisms and Cylinders. 60. Any prism whatever may be regarded as made up of layers parallel to the bases. If a straight line be drawn between the centres of gravity of the two bases, it will pass through the centres of gravity of all these layers. The centre of gravity of the prism will, therefore, lie somewhere in this line, which we may call the axis of the prism. We may also regard the prism as made up of material lines parallel to the lateral edges of the prism. If a plane be passed midway between the two bases and parallel to them, it will bisect all of these lines, and consequently their centres of gravity, as well as that of the entire prism, will lie in it. It must, therefore, be at the point in which the plane cuts the axis of the prism, that is, at its middle point. Hence, the centre of gravity of a prism is at the middle point of its axis. When the bases of the prism become polygons having an infinite number of sides, the prism will become a cylinder, and the principle just demonstrated will still hold good: Hence, the centre of gravity of a cylinder icith parallel bases is at the middle point of its axis. Centre of Gravity of Polyhedrons. 61. If any point within a polyhedron be assumed, and this point be joined with each vertex of the polyhedron, we shall thus form as many pyramids as the solid has faces : the centres of gravity of these pyramids may be found by the rules for such cases. If the centres of gravity of the first and second pyramid be joined by a Straight line, the com- mon centre of gravity of the two may be found by a process entirely similar to that used in finding the centre of gravity of a polygon, observing that the weights of the par tial pyramids are proportional to their volumes, and that they may be represented by their volumes. Having com- pounded the weights of the first ami second, and found its point of application, we may, in like manner, compound this CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 71 with the weight of the third, and so on, till the centre of gravity of the entire pyramid is determined. Any solid body bounded by a curved surface may be regarded as a polyhedron whose faces are extremely small, audits centre of gravity may be determined by the rule just explained. Experimental determination of the Centre of Gravity. 63. We know that the weight of a body always passes through its centre of gravity, no matter what may be the position of the body. If we attach a flexible cord to a body at any point and suspend it freely, it must ultimately come to a state of rest. In this position, the body is acted upon by two forces: the weight, tending to draw the body towards the centre of the earth, and the tension of the cord, which resists this force. In order that the body may be in equili- brium, these forces must be equal and directly opposed. But the direction of the weight passes through the centre of gravity of the body ; hence, the tension of the string, which acts in the direction of the string, must also pass through the same point. This principle gives rise to the following method of finding the centre of gravity of a body. Let AB C represent a body of any form whatever. Attach a string to any point, C, of the body, and suspend it freely ; when the body comes to a state of rest, mark the di- rection of the string ; then suspend the body by a second point, JB, as before, and when it comes to rest, mark the direction of the string ; their point of intersection, G, will be the centre of _, „ ' ' Fig. 41. gravity of the body. Instead of suspending the body by a string, it may be balanced on a point. In this case, the weight acts vertically downwards, and is resisted by the reaction of the point ; hence, the centre of gravity must lie vertically over the point. 72 MECHANICS. If, therefore, the body be balanced at any two points of its surface, and verticals be drawn through the point, in these positions, their intersection will be the centre of gravi- ty of the body. It follows, from what has just been explained, that when a body is suspended by an axis, it can only come to a state of rest when the centre of gravity lies in a vertical plane passed through the axis. The centre of gravity may lie above the axis, below the axis, or on the axis. In the first case, if the body be slightly deranged, it will continue to revolve till the centre of gravity falls below the a\i> ; in the second case, it will return to its primitive po- sition ; in the third case, it will remain in the position in which it is placed. These cases will be again referred to, under the head of Stability. The preceding rules enable us to find the centres of gravi- ty of all lines, surfaces, and solids ; but, on account of the difficulty of applying them in certain cases, we shall annex an outline of some of the methods, by the Differential and Integral Calculus. Those magnitudes whose centres of grav- ity are most readily found by the calculus, are mathematical curves; areas bounded wholly, or in part, by these curves ; curved surfaces ; and volumes bound by curved surfaces. Determination of the Centre of Gravity by means of the Calculus. 6-1. To place Formulas (13) under a suitable form for the application of the calculus, we have simply to substitute for the forces />, 7 > , Substituting in the first of Formulas (33), and reducing, we find, frdy rdy x, = Integrating both numerator and denominator between the limits y — — Jc, and y = + \t, we have, J rdy = re ; -J« u MECHANICS. and, rely . . c ° = r sin -1 — / r sin ■ — c ~2r = arc ABC. Hence, by substitution, a5i = re arc ABC or, arc ABC : c : : r That is, the centre of gravity of an arc of a circle is on the diameter which bisects its chord, and its distance from the centre is a fourth proportional to the arc, chord, and radius. Application to Plane areas. 67. Let the plane XY be taken to coincide with that of the area. We shall have, as before, z x = 0. In this case, we have dm = ydx ; and, consequently, Formulas (32), reduce to __ fxydx _ fjfdx Xl ~ fydx ■ and2/l " fydx (34.) Centre of Gravity of a parabolic area. 6§. Let A OB represent the area, haying its chord at right angles to the axis. Let be the origin of co-ordinates, taken at the vertex, and let the axis of Jl coincide with the axis of the curve; the value of y x will, as before, be equal to 0. To find the value of x x , we have the equa- tion of the parabola, / — i y % = 2px .'. y = ~/2p . x~ . Fig. 48. By substitution in the first of Formulas (34), we have, /V 2p .x 2 dx far dx fy'2p .x 2 dx fx'dx CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 7* Integrating between the limits x = 0, and x = a, we have, and, hence, J x 2 dx = fa , /«* cfo K «! = fa. That is, *Ae cew£re q/* gravity of a segment of a parabola is on its axis, and at a distance from the vertex equal to three-fifths of the altitude of the segment. Application to solids of revolution. 69. If we take the planes XY and XZ passing through the axis of revolution, the centre of gravity will lie in both these planes, therefore y l and g, will both be 0. In this case, the first of Formulas (32) will be sufficient. Since the axis of X coincides with the axis of revolution, dm becomes equal to ' f -{a* - x*)dx f (a 1 - x>)dx Integrating between the limits, x = 0, and x — a, we have a y (°^ - *** = (2-4) = 4 ; and, a Substituting, we have, a* 2a* 3 3 a, = '- = -a = — x 2a. 1 4 3 8 16 That is, the centre of gravity of a semi-prolate spheroid of revolution is on its axis of revolution, and at a distance from the centre equal to three-sixteenths of the major axis of the generating ellipse. The examples above given are enough to indicate the method of applying the calculus to the determination of the centre of gravity. Centre of Gravity of a system of bodies. 71. When we have several bodies, and it is required to find their common centre of gravity, it will, in general, be found most convenient to employ the principle of moments. CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 77 To do this, we first find the centre of gravity of each body separately, by the rules already given. The weight of each body may then be regarded as a force applied at the centre of gravity of the body. The weights being parallel, we have a system of parallel forces, whose points of application are known. If these points are all in the same plane, we may find the lever arms of the resultant of all the weights, with respect to two lines, at right angles to each other in that plane ; and these will make known the point of applica- tion of the resultant, or, what is the same thing, the centre of gravity of the system. If the points are not in the same plane, the lever arms of the resultant of all the weights may be found, with respect to three axes, at right angles to each other ; these will make known the point of application of the resultant weight, or the required position of the centre of gravity. MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES. 1. Required the point of application of the resultant of three equal weights, applied at the three vertices of a plane triangle. SOLUTION. Let ABC (Fig. 34) represent the triangle. The resul- tant of the weights applied at B and C will be applied at J9, the middle point of BC. The weight acting at D being double that at A, the total resultant will be applied at G, making GA — 2 GB; hence, the required point is at the centre of gravity of the triangle. 2. Required the point of application of the resultant of a system of equal parallel forces, applied at the vertices of any regular polygon ? Ans. At the centre of gravity of the polygon. 3. Parallel forces of 3, 4, 5, and 6 lbs., are applied at the successive vertices of a square, whose side is 12 inches. At what distance from the first vertex is the point of applica- tion of their resultant ? 78 MECHANICS. SOLUTION. Take the sides of the square through the first vertex aa axes of moments ; call the side through the first and second vertex the axis of JT, and that through the first and fourth the axis of Y. We shall have from Formulas (13), 4 x 12 + 5 x 12 y, = - 6 = 6; .. 6x12 + 5 X 12 22 and x, = — 1 18 3 Denoting the required distance by e?, we have, d — V^i 2 + 1/\ — 9.475 in. Arts. 4. Seven equal forces are applied at seven of the vertices of a cube. "What is the distance of the point of application of their resultant from the eighth vertex ? SOLUTION. Take the eighth vertex as the origin of co-ordinates, and the three edges passing through it as axes of moments. We shall have from Equations (13), denoting one edge of the cube by a, x 1 = ±a, y x — ±a, and z x = ia. Denoting the required distance by d, we have, d — yjx* + y x * + zf = ±a ^j>r-t to any three rectangular axes will be separately equal to 0. Equations (29) and (30) arc, then, perfectly general in every case <>f equilibrium, provided all of the forces called into play are taken into account. Stable, Unstable, and Indifferent Equilibrium. ?3. A body is in stable equilibrium when, on being slightly disturbed from its state of rest it has a tendency to STABILTT. 81 0» >fc SB Fig. 46. return to that state. This will, in general, be the case when the centre of gravity of the body is at its lowest point. Let A be a spherical body suspended from an axis 0, about which it is free to turn. When the centre of gravity of A lies vertically below the axis, it is in equilibrium, for the weight of the body is exactly counterbalanced by the resistance of the axis. Moreover, the equilibrium is stable; for if the body be deflected to A\ its weight tends to restore it to its position of rest, A. The measure of this tendency is W X OP, that is, the moment of the weight with respect to the axis 0. Under the action of the force W, the body will return to A, and, passing to the other side by virtue of its inertia, will finally come to rest and return again to A\ and so on, till after a few vibrations, when it will come to rest at A. A body is in unstable equilibrium when, being slightly disturbed from its state of rest, it tends to depart still far- ther from it. This will, in general, be the case when the centre of gravity of the body occupies its highest position. Let A be a sphere, connected by an inflexible rod with the axis 0. When the centre of gravity of A lies verti- cally above 0, it will be in unstable equilibrium ; for, if the sphere be de- flected to the position A\ its weight will act with the lever arm OP to in- crease this deflection. The motion will continue till, after a few vibrations, it comes to rest below the axis. In this last position, it will be in stable equilibrium. A body is in indifferent, or neutral, equilibrium when it remains at rest wherever it may be placed. This will, in general, be the case when the centre of gravity continues in the same horizontal plane on being slightlv disturbed. 4* 0> v 1& 4P Fijr. 47. 82 MECHANICS. Let A be a sphere, supported by a horizontal axis OP passing through its centre of gravity. Then, in whatever position it may be placed, it will have no tendency to change this position ; it is, therefore, in indifferent, or neutral equilibrium. In the figure, A, B, and C represent a cone in positions of stable, unstable, and indifferent equilibrium. Fie. 48. Fig. 49. If a wheel, or other solid, be mounted on a horizontal axis, about which it is free to turn, the centre of gravity not lying on the axis, it will be in stable equilibrium, when the centre of gravity is directly below the axis ; and in unstable equi- librium when it is directly above the axis. When the axis passes through the centre of gravity, it will, in every po- sition, be in neutral equilibrium. We infer, then, from the preceding discussion, that when a body at rest is so situated that it cannot be disturbed from its position without raising its centre of gravity, it is in a state of stable equilibrium ; when a slight disturbance de- presses the centre of gravity, it is in a state of unstable equi- librium; when the centre of gravity remains constantly in the same horizontal plane, it is in a state of neutral equilibrium. This principle holds true in combinations of wheels, as in machinery, and indicates the importance of balancing the elements, so that their centres of gravity may remain as nearly as possible in the same horizontal planes. STABILITY. S3 Stability of Bodies on Horizontal Planes. 7-J. A body resting on a horizontal plane may touch it in one, or in more than one point. a In the latter case, the salient poly- /! \\ £on, formed by joining the extreme / — /J \ \— - r 7 points of contact, as abed, is called / l/_\/ / the polygon of support. L - — / Fig. 50. When the direction of the weight of the body, that is, the vertical through its centre of gravity, pierces the plane within the polygon of support, the body is stable, and will remain in equilibrium, unless acted upon by some other force than the weight of the body. In this case, the body will be most easily overturned about that side of the polygon of support which is nearest to the line of direction of the weight. The moment of the weight, with respect to this side, is called the moment of stability of the body. Denoting the weight of the body by W, the distance from the line of direction of the weight to the nearest side of the polygon of support, by r, and the moment of stability by $, we have, S = Wr. The moment of stability is equal to the least moment of any extraneous force which is capable of overturning the body in any direction. TIip. weight of the body remaining the same, its stability will increase with r. If the polygon of support is a regular polygon,, the stability will be great- est, other things being equal, when the direction of the weight passes through its centre. The area of the polygon of support remaining constant, the stability will be greater as the polygon approaches a circle. The polygon of support being regular, but variable in area, the stability will increase as this area increases. Hence, low bodies resting on ex- tended bases, are, other things being equal, more stable than high bodies resting on narrow bases. "When the direction of the weight passes without the polygon of support, the body is unstable, and unless sup 84 MECHANICS. ported by some other force than the weight, it will overturn about that side which is nearest to the direction of the weight. In this case, the product of the weight into the shortest distance from its direction to any side of the poly- gon, is called the moment of instability. Denoting this moment by 7", we have, as before, 1=-- Wr. The moment of instability is equal to the least moment of any force which can be applied to prevent the body from overturning. If the direction of the weight intersect any side of the polygon of support, the body will be in a state of equili- brium bordering on rotation about that side. The stability of a body will be greater, the more nearly the resultant of all the forces acting upon it, including its weight, is to being normal to the bearing Burface. A maximum stability will be obtained, other things being equal, when the resultant is exactly perpendicular to the bearing surface. These principles find application in most of the arts, but more especially in Engineering and Architec- ture. In structures of all kinds intended to be stable, the foundation should be as broad as is consistent with the gen- eral design of the work, that the polygon <>1* support may be as great as possible. The pieces tor transmitting pres- sures should be so combined that the pressures transmitted to the ultimate polygons of support should be as nearly normal to the bearing surfaces as possible, and their lines <•[' direction should pass as near the centres of the polygons of support as may be. The same principles hold good at all the points of junction between pieces employed for transmitting pressures. Hence, joints should be made as nearly normal to th < a as possible. In the construction of machinery the preceding principles apply. Tie- centres of gravity of the rotating pieces should be on their axes, otherwise there will result an irre- gularity of motion, which, besides making the machine STABILITY. 85 work imperfectly, will ultimately destroy the parts of the machine itself. In loading cars, wagons, , which hold each other in equilibrium; the weight W, acting downwards, the ten- sion of the rope acting from 7>, towards A, and the thrust of the pole acting from towards D. Lay off D a = « < Px sii IF + Pcosa ' Px sina IK + Pcosa ' Px sina TF + Pcosa' If we denote the distance FG by y, and the weight of a cubic foot of the material of the pillar by W, we shall have, since W '= 4a*xw, Psina x 4a 2 ivx + Pcosa If, now, we suppose the intensity and direction of the force P to remain the same, whilst x is made to assume every possible value from up to any assumed limit, the value of y will undergo corresponding changes. The suc- cessive points thus determined make up a line which is called the line of resistance, and whose equation is that just deduced. If the pillar is made up of nncemented blocks, it will re- main in equilibrium so long as each joint is pierced by the line of resistance, provided that the tangent to the line of resistance makes with the normal to the joint an angle less than the limiting angle of resistance (Art. 103). STABILITY. 93 The highest degree of stability will be attained when the line of resistance is normal to every joint, and when it passes through the centre of gravity of each. 9. To determine the conditions of equilibrium and sta- bility of an arch of uncemented stones. SOLUTION. Let MNLK represent half of an arch sustained in equi- librium by a horizontal force P, and by the weight of the arch- ^ — 3t stones. Through the centre of /^Mutr gravity of the first arch-stone draw /c ^r a vertical line, and on it lay off a / TV distance to represent the weight / D/ / of that stone. Prolong the direc- K~T^I tion of P, and lay off a distance ^e- 53 - equal to the horizontal pressure. Complete the parallelogram of forces, aobB, and draw the diagonal oB. This will be the resultant of the forces com- bined. Combine this resultant with the weight of the second arch-stone, and this with the weight of the third, and so on, till the last inclusive. The polygon oBCDE, thus found, is the line of resistance, and if this lies wholly within the solid part of the arch, the arch will be stable ; but, if it does not lie within it, the arch will be unstable. A rupture will take place at the joint where the line of re- sistance passes without the solid part of the arch. This problem may be solved analytically, in accordance with the principles already illustrated. It is only intended to indicate the general method of proceeding. 94 MECHANICS. CHAPTER IV. ELEMENTARY MACHINES. Definitions and General Principles. 75. A machine is a contrivance by means of which a force applied at one point is made to produce an effect at 6ome other point. The force applied is called the power, and the point at which it is applied, is called the point of application, The force to be overcome is called the resistance, and the point at which it is to be overcome is called the 'working point. The working of any machine requires a continued applica- tion of power. The source of this power is called the motor. Motors are exceedingly various. Some of the most im- portant are muscular effort, as exhibited by man and beast in various kinds of work ; the weight and living force of water, as exhibited in the various kinds of water-mills ; the expansive force of vapors and gases, as displayed in steam and caloric engines; the force of air in motion, as exhi- bited in the windmill, and in the propulsion of sailing vessels ; the force of magnetic attraction and repulsion, as shown in the magnetic telegraph and various magnetic machines; the elastic force of springs, as shown in watches and various other machines. Of these motors, the most important ones are steam, air, and water power. To icorlc, is to exert a certain pressure through a certain distance. The measure of the quantity of work performed by any force, is the product obtained by multiplying the effective pressure exerted, by the distance through which it is exerted. Machines serve simply to transmit and modify the action of forces. They add nothing to the work of the motor; on ELEMENTARY MA0H1NE8. 95 the contrary, they absorb and render inefficient much of the work that is impressed upon them. For example, in the case of a water-mill, only a small portion of the work ex- pended by the motor is transmitted to the machine, on account of the imperfect manner of applying it, and of this portion a very large fraction is absorbed and rendered prac- tically useless by the various resistances, so that, in reality, only a small fractional portion of the work expended by the motor becomes effective. Of the applied vjork, a part is expended in overcoming friction, stiffness of cords, bands, or chains, resistance of the air, adhesion of the parts, &q. This goes to wear out the machine. A second portion is expended in overcoming sudden impulses, or shocks, arising from the nature of the work to be accomplished, as well as from the imperfect con- nection of the parts, and from the want of hardness and elasticity in the connecting pieces. This also goes to strain and wear out the machine, and also to increase the sources of waste already mentioned. There is often a waste of work arising from a greater supply of motive power than is required to attain the desired result. Thus, in the move- ment of a train of cars on a railroad, the excess of the work of the steam, above what is just necessary to bring the train to the station, is wasted, and has to be consumed by the application of brakes, an operation which not only wears out the brakes, but also, by creating shocks, injures and ulti- mately destroys the cars themselves. Such are some of the sources of the loss of work. A part of these may, by judicious combinations and appliances, be greatly diminished ; but, under the most favorable cir- cumstances, there must be a continued loss of work, which requires a continued supply of power from the motor. In any machine, the quotient obtained by dividing the quantity of usefid, or effective work, by the quantity of applied work, is called the modulus of the machine. As the resistances are diminished, the modulus increases, and the machine becomes more perfect. Could the modulus ever 96 MECHANICS. become equal to 1, the machine would be absolutely perfect Once set in motion, it would continue to move forever, realizing the solution of the problem of perpetual motion. It is needless to state that, until the laws of nature are changed, no such realization need be looked for. In studying the principles of machines, we proceed by approximation. For a first result, it is usual to neglect the effect of hurtful resistances, such as friction, adhesion, stiff- ness of cords, &c Having found the relations between the power and resistance under this hypothesis, these relations are afterwards modified, so as take into account the various resistances. We shall, therefore, in the first instance, regard cords as destitute of weight and thickness, perfectly flexible, and inextensible. We shall also regard bars and connecting pieces as destitute of weight and inertia, and perfectly rigid ; that is, incapable of compression or extension by the forces to which they may be subjected. Elementary Machines. 76. The elementary machines are seven in number — viz., the cord ; the lever ; the inclined pAane ; the jndley, a combination of the cord and lever; the wheel and axle, also a combination of the cord and lever; the screic, a combination of two inclined planes twisted about an axis ; and the icedge, a simple combination of two inclined planes. It may easily be seen that there are in reality but three elementary machines — the cord, the lever, and the inclined plane. It is, however, more convenient to consider the seven above- named as elementary. By a suitable combination of these seven elements, the most complicated pieces of mechanism are produced. The Cord. 77, Let AB represent a cord solicited by two forces, P and 7?, applied at its extremi- ties, A and B. In order that p ~* ^ 5 """*""* the cord may be in equilibrium, Flg 69 it is evident, in the first place, that two forces must act in the direction of the cord, and in ELEMKNTARY MACHINES. 97 such a manner as to stretch it, otherwise the cord would bend under the action of the forces. In the second place, the intensities of the forces must be equal, otherwise the greater force would prevail, and motion would ensue. Hence, in order that two forces applied at the extremities of a cord may be in equilibrium, the forces must be equal and directly opposed. The measure of the tension of the cord, or the force by which any tico of its adjacent particles are urged to sepa- rate, is the intensity of one of tJie equal forces, for it is evident that the middle point of the cord might be fixed and either force withdrawn, without diminishing or increasing the tension. When a cord is solicited in opposite directions by unequal forces directed along the cord, the tension will be measured by the intensity of the lesser force. Let AB represent a cord solicited by two groups of forces applied at its two extrem- ities. In order that these forces may be in equilibrium, the resultant of the group ap- plied at A and the resultant of the group at B must be equal and directly opposed. Hence, if we suppose all of the forces at each point to be resolved into components respectively coinciding with, and at right angles to AB, the normal components at each of the points must be such as to maintain each other in equilibrium, and the resultants of the remaining components at each of the points A and B must be equal and directly opposed. Let ABCD represent a cord, at the different points A, B, C, D, of which are applied groups of forces. If these forces are in equili- brium through the interven- tion of the cord, there must necessarily be an equili- * brium at each point of ap- plication. Denote the tension of AB, BC, CJJ, by t, t', t", 5 98 MECHANICS. and the forces .applied by P, P', P", ^ v, ^'\ through a guide between j ^^^^5s>^ ' v B and E. ^ When A is ? |f}i^~ [fe^— ^^^ G do] tressed, BE is forced | against the upright F, so Fig. 67. as to compress, with great force, any body placed between E and F. This machine is called the elbow-joint jyress, and is used in printing, in moulding bullets, in striking coins and medals, in punching holes, riveting steam boilers, arailelism in the same plane, is of essential importance. In addition to this, the middle points of the knife-edges A, B, and F, should be on the same straight line, perpendicular to the plane through the fulcrum F, and the centre of gravity of the beam. The knife-edges should be of hardened steel, and their supports should either be of polished agate, or, what is still better, of hardened steel, so as to diminish the effect of friction along the lines of contact. The fulcrum may be made horizontal, by leveling-screws passing through the foot-plate L. A needle JV, projects upwards, or some- times downwards, which, playing in front of a graduated arc Gil, serves to show the deflection of the line of knife- edges from the horizontal. When the instrument is not in use, the fulcrum may be raised from its bearings by a pinion K, working into a rack in the interior of the standard FK. The knife-edges A and B may, by a similar arrangement, be raised from their bearings also. The ordinary balances of the shops are similar in their general plan ; but many of the preceding arrangements are omitted. The scale-pans being exactly alike, the balance should remain in equilibrium, with the line AB horizontal, not only when the balance is without a load, but also when the pans are loaded with equal weights ; and when AB in 10-i MECHANICS. deflected from the horizontal, it should return to this posi- tion. This result is attained by throwing the centre of gravity slightly below the line A B. To test a balance, let two weights be placed in the pans that will exactly counter- balance each other, then change the weights to the opposite pans ; if the equilibrium is still maintained, the balance is said to be true. The sensibility of a balance is its capability of mdicatbig small differences of weight. The sensibility will be greater, as the lengths of the arms increase, as the centre of gravity of the beam approaches the fulcrum, as the mass of the load decreases, and as the length of the needle increases. The centre of gravity of the beam being below the fulcrum, it may be made to approach to or recede from it, by a solid ball of metal attached to the beam by means of a screw, by which it may be raised or depressed at pleasure. The remaining conditions of sensibility will be limited by the strength of the material, and the use to which it is to be applied. Should it be found that a balance is not true, it may still be employed, with but slight error, as indicated below. Denote the length of the lever arms, by r and /•', and the weight of the body, by W. When the weight W is applied at the extremity of the arm r, denote the counterpoising weights employed, by W ; and when it is applied at the extremity of the arm /•', denote the counterpoising weights employed, by W". We shall have, from the principle of the lever, Wr = W'r', and ^Yr' = W'r. Multiplying these equations, member by member, we have, li'V/ = W" li'/r'; /. W= y/W' II'": that is, ill' ti-in weight is equal to the squan root of the pro- duct of the apparent weights. A still better method, and one that is more free from the effects of errors in construction, is to place the body to be Fig. ELEMENTARY MACHINES. 105 weighed in one scale and add counterpoising weights till the beam is horizontal ; then remove the body to be weighed and replace it by known weights till the beam is again hori- zontal ; the sum of the replacing weights will be the weight required. If, in changing the loads, the positions of the knife-edges are not moved, this method is almost exact, but this is a condition difficult to fulfill in manipulation. The Steelyard. 82. The steelyard is an instrument used for weighing bodies. It consists of a lever AB, called the beam ; a ful- crum E; a scale-pan Z>, attached at the extremity of one arm; and a known weight E, movable along - a V^y^ l 5 " M l0 ' g gF f t the other arm. We shall / \ E suppose the weight of E to be 1 lb. This instrument is sometimes more conve- nient than the balance, but it is more inaccurate. The con- ditions of sensibility are essentially the same as for the balance. To graduate the instrument, place a pound-weight in the pan Z>, and move the counterpoise E till the beam rests horizontal — let that point be marked 1 ; next place a 10 lb. weight in the pan, and move the counterpoise E till the beam is again horizontal, and let that point be marked 10 ; divide the intermediate space into nine equal parts, and mark the points of division as shown in the figure. These spaces may be subdivided at pleasure, and the scale ex- tended to any desirable limits. We have supposed that the centre of gravity coincides with the fulcrum ; when this is not the case, the weight of the instrument must be taken into account as a force applied at its centre of gravity. We may then graduate the beam by experiment, or we may compute the lever arms, corresponding to the different weights, by the general principle of moments. To weigh any body with the steelyard, place it in the scale-pan and move the counterpoise E along the beam till 5* 106 MECHANICS. an equilibrium is established between the two ; the cor- responding mark on the beam will indicate the weight. Fig. 70. The bent Lever Balance. §3. This balance consists of a bent lever ACB fulcrum C ; a scale-pan D ; and a graduated arc EF, whose centre co- incides with the centre of motion C. When a weight is placed in the scale-pan, the pan is de- pressed and the lever- arm of the weight is diminished ; the weight B is raised, and its lever-arm increased. When the moments of the two forces become equal, the instrument will come to a state of rest, and the weight will be indicated by a needle projecting from _Z>, and playing in front of the arc FE. The zero of the arc EF is at the point indicated by the needle when there is no load in the pan D. The instrument may be graduated experimentally by placing weights of 1, 2, 3, &c, pounds in the pan, and mark- ing the points at which the needle comes to rest, or it may be graduated by means of the general principle of moments. We need not explain this method of graduation. To weigh a body with the bent lever balance, place it in the scale-pan, and note the point at which the needle comes to rest ; the reading will make known the weight sought. Compound Balances. 84. Compound balances are much used in weighing heavy articles, as merchandise, coal, freight for shipping, &c. A great variety of combinations have been employed, one of which is annexed. A B is a platform, on which the object to be weighed is ELEMENTARY MACHINES. 107 Fig. 71. placed ; B C is a guard firmly attached to the platform ; the platform is supported upon the knife-edge fulcrum F, and the piece D, through the medium of a brace CD ; GF'\§ a lever turn- ing about the fulcrum F, and suspended by a rod from the point L ; LN is a lever having its fulcrum at M, and sustaining the piece D by a rod KH\ is a scale-pan suspended from the end N oi the lever LN. The instrument is so constructed, that BF\ GF:: KM: LM; and the distance JTM is generally made equal to y 1 ^ of 3IN. The parts are so arranged that the beam LN shall rest horizontally in equilibrium when no weight is placed on the platform. If, now, a body Q be placed upon the platform, a part of its weight will be thrown upon the piece X>, and, acting downwards, will produce an equal pressure at K. The remaining part will be thrown upon F, and, acting upon the lever FG, will produce a downward pressure at 67, which will be transmitted to L ; but, on account of the relation given by the above proportion, the effect of this pressure upon the lever Xi\ r will be the same as though the pressure thrown upon E had been applied directly at K. The final effect is, therefore, the same as though the weight of Q had been applied at 7T, and, to counterbalance it, a weight equal to T \ of Q must be placed in the scale-pan 0. To weigh a body, then, by means of this scale, place it on the platform, and add weights to the scale-pan till the lever LN is horizontal, then 10 times the sum of the weight added will be equal to the weight required. By making other combinations of levers, or by combining the princi- 108 MECHANICS. pie of the steelyard with this balance, objects may be weighed by using a constant counterpoise. EXAMPLES. 1. In a lever of the first class, the lever arm of the resistance is 2| inches, that of the power, 334 n and the resistance 100 lbs. What is the power necessary to hold the resistance in equilibrium ? Aus. 8 lbs. 2. Four weights of 1, 3, 5, and 7 lbs. respectively, are suspended from points of a straight lever, eight inches apart. How far from the point of application of the first weight must the fulcrum be situated, that the weights may be in equilibrium ? SOLUTION. Let x denote the required distance. Then, from Art. (36) 1 X x + 3(x — 8) + 5(x - 16) + 7(flJ - 24) = ; /. x — 17 in. A?is. 3. A lever, of uniform thickness, and 12 feet long, is kept horizontal by a weight of 100 lbs. applied at one extremity, and a force P applied at the other extremity, so as to make an angle of 30° with the horizon. The fulcrum is 20 inches from the point of application of the weight, and the weight of the lever is 10 lbs. What is the value of P, and what is the pressure upon the fulcrum ? SOLUTION. The lever arm of P is equal to 124 in. x sin 30° = 62 in., and the lever arm of the weight of the lever is 52 in. Hence, 20 x 100 = 10 x 52 + P x 62 ; .-. P = 24 lbs. nearly We have, also, R = x/X 2 + Y 1 = VXllO + 24 Sd 30°) 2 "r (24cos30°)'. .*. B = 123.8 lbs. ; ELEMENTABT MACHINES. 109 X 20.785 __ and, cos a = -g = ^-g- = .16789; .-. a — 80° 20' 02". 4. A .leavy lever rests on a fulcrum which is 2 feet from one end, 8 feet from the other, and is kept horizontal by a weight of 100 lbs., applied at the first end, and a weight of 18 lbs., applied at the other end. What is the weight of the lever, supposed of uniform thickness throughout ? SOLUTION. Denote the required weight by x ; its arm of lever is 3 feet. We have, from the principle of the lever, 100 X 2 := x x 3 + 18 X 8 ; .\ x = 18f lbs. Ans. 5. Two weights keep a horizontal lever at rest ; the pressure on the fulcrum is 10 lbs., the difference of the weights is 4 lbs., and the difference of lever arms is 9 inches. What are the weights, and their lever arms ? Ans. The weights are 7 lbs. and 3 lbs. ; their lever arms are 15| in., and 6f in. 6. The apparent weight of a body weighed in one pan of a false balance is 5j lbs., and in the other pan it is 6 T 6 T lbs. What is the true weight ? TF= yy x ff = 6 lbs. Ans. 7. In the preceding example, what is the ratio of the lever arms of the balance ? SOLUTION. Denote the shorter arm by I, and the longer arm by »/, We shall have, from the principle of moments, 6/ = 5i x nl, or, 6?il = Q T 6 T l ; .-. n = \ T \. That is, the longer arm equals 1 T T T times the shorter arm. ilO MKCHANICS. The Inclined Plane. 85. An inclined plane is a plane inclined to the horizon. In this machine, let the power be a force applied to a body either to prevent motion down the plane, or to produce motion np the plane, and let the resistance be the weight of the body acting vertically downwards. The power may be applied in any direction whatever ; but we shall, for sim- plicity's sake, suppose it to be in a vertical plane, taken per- pendicular to the inclined plane. Let AB represent the inclined plane, a body resting on it, R the weight of the body, and P the force applied to hold it in equilibrium. In order that these two forces may keep the body at rest, friction being neglected, their resultant must be perpendicular to AB (Art. 72). _ Fig72 . When the direction of the force P is given, its intensity may be found geometrically, as fol- lows : draw OR to represent the weight, and Q perpen- dicular to AB ; through R draw RQ parallel to OP, and through Q draw QP parallel to OR ; then will OP repre- sent the required intensity, and OQ the pressure on the plane. When the intensity of P is given, its direction may be found as follows : draw OR and OQ as before ; with R as a centre, and the given intensity as a radius, describe an arc cutting OQ'm Q; draw RQ, and through draw OP parallel, and equal to R Q ; it will represent the direction of the force P. If we denote the angle between P and R by /< to a normal pn 8i ure of ont pound. Having given the normal pressure in pounds, and the unit of friction, the entire friction will be found bv multi plying these quantities together. HURTFUL RESISTANCES. 133 There is a second method of finding the value of/ ex- perimentally, as follows : Let AB be an inclined plane, formed of one of the sub- stances, and a cubical block, formed of the other substance, and resting upon it. Elevate the plane till the block just begins to slide down the plane by its own weight. Denote the angle of in- clination, at this instant, by a, and Fig. 93. the weight of 0, by W. Resolve the force W into two components, one normal to the sur face of the plane, and the other one parallel to it. Denote the former component by P, and the latter by Q. Since W is perpendicular to A C, and OP to AB, the angle WOP is equal to a. Hence, P = TFcosa, and Q = TFsina. The normal pressure being equal to TFcosa, and the force of friction being TFsina, we shall have, from the principles already explained, TFsina BO J TFcosa A The angle a is called the angle of friction. Limiting Angle of Resistance. 103. Let AB be any plane surface, and a body rest- ing upon it. Let B 1 >e the resultant of all the forces acting upon it, in- Q eluding the weight applied at the ^ -.,. "/*l centre of gravity. Denote the angle / \ between R and the normal to AB, H * p by a, and suppose R to be resolved Fi 94> into two components P and §, the former parallel to AB, and the latter perpendicular to it ; we alial 1 have, P = i^sina, and Q = Rcosc. 134 MECHANICS. The friction due to the normal pressure will be equal to f-Rcosji. Now, when the tangential component jR*inx is less than /Vicos*, the body will remain at rest ; when it is greater than /ifoos*, the body will slide along the plane ; and when the two are equal, the body will be in a state bordering on motion along the plane. Placing the two equal, we have, fltcosoi = Ushvx ; .'. f = tan/. The value of a is called the limiting angle of resistance, and is equal to the inclination of the plane, when .the body is about to slide ^ __^_ down by its own weight. If, now, the ^^_L~-/ R line Oil be revolved about the normal, it \ ' w will generate a conical surface, within / \/ 7 which, if any force whatever, including / o / the weight, be applied at the centre of Fig. 95. gravity, the body will remain at rest, and without which, if a sufficient force be applied, the body will slide along the plane. This cone is called the limiting cone of resistance. The values of/", or the coefficient of friction, in some of the most common cases, as determined by Morix, is appended : TABLE. Bodies between which friction takes place. Coefficient of friction. Iron on oak, .62 Cast iron on oak, .49 Oak on oak, fibres parallel, .... .48 Do., do., greased, .10 Cast iron on cast iron, .15 Wrought iron on wrought iron, . . .14 Brass on iron, .16 Brass on brass, .20 Wrought iron on cast iron, . . . .19 Cast iron on elm, .19 Soft limestone on the same, .... .64 Hard limestone on the same, . . .38 HURTFUL RESIST ANCF.S. 135 Bodies between ichich friction takes place. Coefficient of friction. Leather belts on wooden pulleys, . .47 Leather belts on cast iron pulleys, . .28 Cast iron on cast iron, greased, . . .10 Pivots or axes of wrought or cast iron, on brass or cast- iron pillows : 1st, when constantly supplied with oil, .05 2nd, when greased from time to time, .08 3rd, without any application, ... .15 Rolling Friction. 104. Rolling friction is the resistance which one body offers to another when rolling along its surface, the two being pressed together by some force. This resistance, like that in sliding friction, arises from the inequalities of the two surfaces. The coefficient, or unit, of rolling friction is equal to the quotient obtained by dividing the entire force of friction by the normal pressure. This coefficient is much less than the coefficient of sliding friction. The following laws of friction have been established, when a cylindrical body or wheel rolls upon a plane : First, the coefficient of rolling friction is proportional to the normal pressure : Secondly, it is inversely proportioned to the diameter of the cylinder or to heel: Thirdly, it increases as the surface of contact and velocity increase. In many cases there is a combination of both sliding and rolling friction in the same machine. Thus, in a car upon a railroad-track, the friction at the axle is sliding, and that between the circumference of the wheel and the track is rolling. Adhesion. 105. Adhesion is the resistance which one body ex- periences in moving upon another in consequence of the cohesion existing; between the molecules of the surf ices in contact. This resistance increases when the surfaces are 136 MECHANICS. allowed to remain for some time in contact, and is very slight when motion lias been established. Both theory and experiment show that adhesion between the same surfaces is proportional to the extent of the surface of contact. The coefficient of adhesion is the quotient obtained by dividing the entire adhesion by the area of the surface of contact. Or, denoting the entire adhesion by A, the area of the surface of contact by S y and the coefficient of adhesion by a, we have, A a = V A = aS. To find the entire adhesion, we multiply the unit of adhesion by the area of the surface of contact. Stiffness of Cords. 106. Let represent a pulley, with a cord AJB^ wrapped around its circumference, and suppose a force P, applied at i?, to over- come the resistance i?, and impart motion to the pulley. As the rope winds upon the pulley, at (7, its rigidity acts to increase the arm of lever of i?, and to overcome this resistance to flexure an additional force is required. For the same pulley, this addi- tional force may be represented by the algebraic expression, a -f- bll, Fig. 96. in which a and b are constants dependent upon the nature and construction of the rope, and li is the resistance to be overcome, or the tension of the covd. AC. The values of a and b for different ropes have been ascertained by experi- ment, and tabulated. Finally, if the *-\\uv rope be vround upon pulleys of different diameters, the additional force is found to vary inversely as their diameters. If the diameter of .lie pulley be denoted by D, and the resistance due to stiffness of cordage be denoted by S, we shall have, HURTFUL RESISTANT. ES. 137 Q a + bE S = — g~. In the case of the pulley, if we neglect friction, we shall have, when the motion is uniform, a + bJR P = J2 + — p-, for the algebraic expression of the conditions of equilibrium. The values of a and b have been determined experi- mentally for all values of R and Z>, and tabulated. Atmospheric Resistance. 107. The atmosphere exercises a powerful resistance to the motion of bodies passing through it. This resistance is due to the inertia of the particles of air, which must be overcome by the force of a moving body. It is evident, in the first place, other things being equal* that the resistance will depend upon the amount of surface of the moving body which is exposed to the air in the direction of the motion. In the second place, the resistance must increase with the square of the velocity of the moving body ; for, if we sup- pose the velocity to be doubled, there will be twice as many particles met with in a second, and each particle will collide against the moving body with twice the force, hence ; if the velocity be doubled, the resistance will be quadrupled. By a similar course of reasoning, it may be shown that, if the velocity be tripled, the retardation will become nine times as great, and so on. If, therefore, the retardation correspond- ing to a square foot of surface, at any given velocity, be determined, the retardation corresponding to any surface and any velocity whatever may be computed. Influence of Friction on the Inclined Plane. 108. Let it be required to determine the relation between the power and resistance, when the power is just on the point of imparting motion to a body up an inclined plane, friction being taken into account. 138 MECHANICS. Let AB represent the plane, the body, OP the power on the point of imparting motion up the plane, and OR the weight of the body. Denote the power by P, the weight by R, the in- clination of the plane by a, and the angle between the direction of the power and the normal to the plane by (3. Let P and R be resolved into components re- Fi 97 spectively parallel and perpendi- dicular to the plane. We shall have, for the parallel com- ponents, Rsina and Psin/3, and for the perpendicular com- ponents, Rcosol and Pcos/3. The resultant of the normal components will be equal to Rcosol — Pcos3 ; and, if we denote the coefficient of friction by /, we shall have for the entire force of friction (Art. 102), /(Rcosx — Pcos/3). When we consider the body on the eve of motion up the plane, the component jPsin/3 must be equal and directly opposed to the resultant of the force of friction and the component Psina ; hence, we must have, Psin-S — Psina +■ f (Reosx — PcosQ). Performing the multiplications indicated, and reducing, we have, j> = Ji \»™+Jp±\ . . . (51 .) ( sin>5 -f-/cos,3 j ' If we suppose an equilibrium to exist, the body being on on the eve of motion down the plane, we shall have. Psin3 +/(7vcosa — Pcos/3) = Psina. Whence, bv reduction, T = R VT- f™\ \ . . . (62.1 / sin/3 — /cos/3 | v HURTFUL RESISTANCES. 139 From these expressions, two values of P may be found, when a, /3, f\ and R are given. It is evident that any value of P greater than the tirst will >«*use the body to slide up the plane, that any value less than the second yill permit it to slide down the plane, and that for any inter- mediate value the body will remain at rest on the plane. If we suppose P to be parallel to the plane, we shall have sin/3 r= 1, cos/3 = 0, and the two values of P reduce to P = jR(sina + /cosa) . . . ( 53.) and, P = R(sma - /cosa) . . . ( 54.) If friction be neglected, we have / = 0; whence, by substitution, p *>• P BO a result which agrees with that deduced in a preceding article. To find the quantity of work of the power whilst drawing a body up the entire length of the inclined plane, it may be observed that the value of P, in Equation (53), is equal to that required to maintain the body in uniform motion after motion has commenced. Multiplying both members of that equation by AJB, we have, P x AB = R x AB sin a + fR x AB cos* = R x BC +fR x AC. But R x B C is the quantity of work necessary to raise the body through the vertical height BC; and fR x AC, is the quantity of work necessary to draw the body horizon- tally through the distance A C (Art. 75). Hence, the quan- tity of work required to draw a body up an inclined plane, when the power is parallel to the plane, is equal to the quan- tity of work necessary to draw it horizontally across the base of the plane, plus the quantity of work necessary to raise it vertically through the height of the plane. 140 MECHANICS. A curve situated in a vertical plane may be regarded as made up of an infinite number of inclined planes. We infer, therefore, that the quantity of work necessary to draw a body up a curve, the power acting always parallel to the direction of the curve, is equal to the quantity of work ne- cessary to draw the body over the horizontal projection of the curve, plus the quantity of work necessary to raise th-3 body through a height equal to the difference of altitude of the two extremities of the curve. The last two principles enable us to compare the quanti- ties of work necessary to draw a train of cars over a hori- zontal track, and up an inclined track, or a succession of inclined tracks. We may, therefore, compute the length of a horizontal track which will consume the same amount of work, furnished by the motor, as is actually consumed in consequence of the undulation of the track. We are thus enabled to compare the relative advantages of different proposed routes of railroad, with respect to the motive power required for working them. Line of Least Traction. 109. The force employed to draw a body with uniform motion along an inclined plane, is called the force of trac- tion / and the line of direction of this force is the line of traction. In Equation (51), P represents the force of trac- tion required to keep a body in uniform motion up an inclined plane, and (3 is the angle which the line of traction makes with the normal. It is plain, that when f3 varies, other things being the same, the value of P will vary ; there will evidently be some value of 3, which will render P the least possible ; the direction of P in this case, is called the line of least traction; and it is along this line that a force can be applied with greatest advantage, to draw a body up an inclined plane. If we examine the expression for P, in Equation (51), we see that the numerator remains constant ; therefore, the expression for P will be least possible when the denominator is the greatest possible. By a simple pro- HURTFUL RESISTANCES. 141 cess of the Differential Calculus, it may be shown that the denominator will be the greatest possible, or a maximum, when, / = cot o, or / - tan (90° — /8). That is, the power will be applied most advantageously, when it makes an angle with the inclined plane equal to the angle of friction. From the second value of jP, it may be shown, in like maimer, that a force will be most advantageously applied, to prevent a body from sliding down the plane, when its direc- tion makes an angle with the plane equal to the supplement of the angle of friction, the angle being estimated as before from that part of the plane lying above the body. Friction on an Axle. 110. Let it be required to determine the position of equilibrium of a horizontal axle, resting in a cylindrical box, when the power is just on the point of overcoming the friction betwi en the axle and box. Let 0' be the centre of a cross section of the axle, the centre of the cross sec- tion of the box, and N their point of con- tact, when the power is on the point of overcoming the friction between the axle and box. The element through iVwill be the line of con- tact of the axle and box. When the axle is only acted upon by its own weight, the element of contact will be the lowest element of the box. If, now, a power be applied to turn the axle in the direction indicated by the arrow-head, the axle will roll up the inside of the box until the resultant of all the forces acting upon it becomes normal to the surface of the axle at some point of the element through X. This normal force pressing the axle against the box, will give rise to a force of friction act- ing tangentially upon the axle, which will be exactly equal to the tangential force applied at the circumference of the 142 MECHANICS. axle to produce rotation. If the axle be rolled further up the side of the box, it will slide back to N\ if it be moved down the box, it will roll back to iV, under the action of the force. In tins position of the axle, it is in the condition of a body resting upon an inclined plane, just on the point of sliding down the plane, but restrained by the force of fric- tion. Hence, if a plane be passed tangent to the surface of the box, along the element jV, it will make with the horizon an angle equal to the angle of friction. The rela- tion between the power and resistance may then be fc und, 98 in Art. 108. RECTILINEAR MOTION. 143 CHAPTER V. RECTILINEAR AND PERIODIC MOTION. Motion. 111. A material point is in motion when it continually changes its position in space. When the path of the moving point is a straight line, the motion is rectilinear ; when it is a curved line, the motion is curvilinear. When the motion is curvilinear, we may regard the path as made up of infi- nitely short straight lines ; that is, we may consider it as a polygon, whose sides are infinitely small. If any side of this polygon be prolonged in the direction of the motion, it will be a tangent to the curve. Hence, we say, that a point always moves in the direction of a tangent to its path. Uniform Motion. 112. Uniform motion is that in which the moving point describes equal spaces in any arbitrary equal portions of time. If we denote the space described hi one second by v, and the space described in t seconds by s, we shall have, from the definition, s = vt ; .'. v = - . . . (55.) From the first of these equations, we see that the space described in any time is equal to the product of velocity and the time ; and, from the second, we see that the velo- city is equal to the space described in any time, divided by that time. These laws hold true for all cases of uniform motion. If we denote by ds the space described in the infinitely short time dt, we shall have, from the last principle, -S <»•> 144 MECHANICS. which is the differential equation of uniform motion, v being constant. Clearing this equation of fractions, and integ- rating, we have, 8 = vt + C . . . . ( 57.) which is the most general equation of uniform motion. If, in (57), we make t = 0, we shall have, s = O. Hence, we see that the constant of integration represent? the space passed over by the point, from the origin of spaces up to the beginning of the time t. This space is called the initial space. Denoting it by s\ we have, s = vt + s' . . . . (58.) If s' = 0, the origin of spaces corresponds to the origin of times, and we have, s = vt, the same as the first of Equations (55.) Varied Motion. 113. Varied motion is that in which the velocity is continually changing. It can only result from the action of an incessant force. To find the differential equations of varied motion, let us denote the velocity at the time t, by w, and the space passed over up to that time, by 8. In the succeeding instant dt, the space described will be cfe, and the velocity gener- ated will be do. Now, the space <;&, which is described in the infinitely small time dt, may be regarded as having been described with the uniform velocity v. Hence, from Equa- tion (55), we have, » = S ( 59 -> Let us denote the acceleration due to the incessant force at the time t y by '. C = 8'. RECTILINEAR MOTION. 14 J That is, C is equal to the Telocity at the beginning of the time t, and C is equal to space passed over up to the same time. These values of the velocity and space are called, respectively, the initial velocity, and the initial space. Substituting for G and C these values in (65) and (66), they become, v = v' +ft (67.) s = s f + v't + \ftf . . ( 68.) From these equations, we see that the velocity at any eiine t, is made up of two parts, the initial velocity, and the velocity generated during the time t ; we also see, that the space is made up of three parts, the initial space, the space due to the initial velocity for the time t, and the space due to the action of the incessant force during the same time. By giving suitable values to v' and s' ', Equations (67) and (68) may be made to express every phenomenon of varied motion. If we suppose both v' and s' equal to 0, the body will move from a state of rest at the origin of times, and Equations (67) and (68) will become, v = ft (69.) s = ±ft 2 (70.) From the first of these equations, we see that, in uniformly varied motion, the velocity varies as the time ; and, from the second one, we see that the space described varies as the square of the time. If, in Equation (70), we make t = 1, we have, /; or, / = 2*. That is, when a body moves from a state of rest, under the action of a constant force, the acceleration is equal tc twice the space passed over in the first second of time. If, in the preceding equations, we suppose f to be essen- tially positive, the motion will be uniformly accelerated ; if we suppose it to be negative, the motion will be uniformly 148 MECHANICS. retarded. In the latter case, Equations (67) and (68) become, v = v'-ft (71.) 8 = 8' + v't - \f? . . . ( 72.) Application to Falling Bodies. 115. The force of gravity is the force exerted by the earth upon all bodies exterior to it, tending to draw them towards it. It is found by observation, that this force is directed towards the centre of the earth, and that its intensity varies inversely, as the square of the distance from the centre. Since the centre of the earth is so far distant from the surface, the variation in intensity for small elevations above the surface will be inappreciable. Hence, we may re- gard the force of gravity at any place on the earth's sur- face, and for small elevations at that place, as constant, in which case, the equations of the preceding article become immediately applicable. The force of gravity acts equally upon all the particles of a body, and were there no resistance offered, it would impart the same velocity, in the same time, to any two bodies whatever. The atmosphere is a cause of resistance, tending to retard the motion of all bodies fulling through it ; and of two bodies of equal mass, it retards that one the most, which offers the greatest surface to the direc- tion of the motion. In discussing the laws of falling bodies, it will, therefore, be found convenient, in the first place, to regard them as being situated in vacuum, after which, a method will be pointed out, by means of which the veloci- ties can be so diminished, that atmospheric resistance may be neglected. Let us denote the acceleration due to gravity, at any point on the earth's surface, by g, and the space fallen through in the time t, by h. Then, if the body moves from * state of rest at the origin of times, Equations (69) and (70) will give, v = gt ( 73.) h =\g? (74.) KECTILTNEAR MOTION. 149 From these equations, we see that the velocities at two different times are proportional to the times, and the spaces to the squares of the times. It has been found by experiment that the velocity im- parted to a body in one second of time by the action of the force of gravity in the latitude of New York, is about 32i feet. Making g = 321 ft. 5 and giving to t the successive values I s , 2 s , 3 s , &c, in Equations (73) and (74), we shall have the results indicated in the following TABLE. TIME F.LAPSED. VELOCITIES ACQUIRED. SPACES DESCRIBED. SECONDS. FEET. FEET. 1 321 16 T V 2 64i 641 3 961 144-2 4 128J 2571 5 150f 402 T i 5 &C. &c. &c. Solving Equation (74) with respect to t, we have, t = (75.) That is, the time required for a body to fall through any height is equal to the square root of the quotient obtained by dividing twice the height in feet by 32i. Substituting this value of t in Equation ( 73), we have. = 9* or v 9 2ghi 150 MECHANICS. whence, by solving with reference to v and h respectively, v = V^gh, and h = — . . ( 76.) These equations are of frequent use in dynamical investiga- tions. In them the quantity v is called the velocity due to the height A, and the quantity A, the height due to the velocity v. If we suppose the body to be projected downwards with a velocity v', the circumstances of motion will be made known by the Equations, v = v' + gt, h = v't + \gt\ In these equations we have supposed the origin of spaces to be at the point at which the body is projected down- wards. Motion of Bodies projected vertically upwards. 116. Suppose a body to be projected vertically upwards from the origin of spaces with a velocity v\ and afterwards to be acted upon by the force of gravity. In this case, the force of gravity acts to retard the motion. Making in (71) and (72), s' = o, f = g, and s = h, they become, v — v' — gt (77.) h = v't — \g? . . . . ( 78.) In these equations, h is positive when estimated upwards from the origin of spaces, and consequently negative, when estimated downwards from the same point. From Equation (77), we see that the velocity diminishes as the time increases. The velocity will be 0, when, v — gt — 0, or when t = • v' If t continues to increase beyond the value — , v will KIX TIL.NKAR MOTION. 151 become negative, and the body will retrace its path. Hence, the time required for the body to reach its highest elevation, is equal to the initial velocity divided by the force of gravity. Eliminating t from Equations (77) and (78), we have, v'* — ?r *=H- (V9>) Making v = 0, in the last equation, we have, h= I- (80.) 2g v Hence, the greatest height to which the body will ascend, is equal to the square of the initial velocity, divided by twice the force of gravity. This height is that due to the initial velocity (Art. 115). v' If, in Equation (77), we make t — t\ we find, «/ V = 9? (81.) v ' If, in the same equation, we make t = \- t\ we find, t/ v= -g? (82.) Hence, the velocities at equal times before and after reaching the highest points, are equal. The difference of signs shows that the body is moving in opposite directions at the times considered. If we substitute these values of v success: vely, in Equa- tion (£9), we shall, in both cases, find 5" - gH'* ~g - which shows that the points at which the velocities are equal, both in ascending and descending, are equally distant from the highest point ; that is, they arc coincident. Hence, 152 MECHANICS. if a body be projected vertically upwards, it will ascend to a certain point, and then return upon its path, in such a man* ?ier, that the velocities in ascending and descending icill be equal at the same points. EXAMPLES. 1. Through what distance will a body fall from a state of rest in vacuum, in 10 seconds, and through what space will it fall during the last second ? Ans. 16081 ft., and 305^ ft. 2. In what time will a body fall from a state of rest through a distance of 1200 feet ? Ans. 8.63 sec. 3. A body was observed to fall through a height of 100 feet in the last second. How long was the body falling, and through what distance did it descend ? SOLUTION. If we denote the distance by A, and the time by t, we shall have, h = \gt\ and h - 100 = Uj(t - l) 2 ; .*. t = 3.6 sec, and A — 208.44 ft. Ans. 4. A body falls through a height of 300 feet. Through what distance does it fall in the last two seconds ? The entire time occupied, is 4.32 sec. The distance fallen through in 2.32 sec, is 86.57 ft. Hence, the distance re- quired is 300 ft. — 86.57 ft. = 213.43 ft. Ans, 5. A body is projected vertically upwards, with a veloci- ty of 60 feet. To what height will it rise ? Ans. 55.9 ft. 6. A body is projected vertically upwards with a veloci- ty of 483 ft. In what time will it rise to a height of 1610 feet ? We have, from Equation (78), 1610 = 483* - 16^ ; ••• t = Vvnr ± VoV i or, t = 26.2 sec, and t — 3.82 sec. The smaller value of t gives the time required ; the larger RFXTILINEAR MOTION. 153 value of t gives the time occupied in rising to its greatest height, and returning to the point which is 1610 feet from the starting point. V. A body is projected vertically upwards, with a veloci- ty of 161 feet, from a point 214J feet above the earth. In what time will it reach the surface of the earth, and with what velocity will it strike ? SOLUTION. The body will rise from the starting point 402.9 ft. The time of rising will be 5 sec. ; the time of falling from the highest point to the earth will be 6.2 sec. Hence, the re- quired time is 11.2 sec. The required velocity is 199 ft. 8. Suppose a body to have fallen through 50 feet, when a second begins to fall just 100 feet below it. How far will the latter body fall before it is overtaken by the former ? A ns. 50 feet Restrained Vertical Motion. 117. We have seen that the entire force exerted in moving a body is equal to the acceleration, multiplied by the mass (Art. 24). Hence, the acceleration is equal to the moving force, divided by the mass. In the case of a filling body, the moving force varies directly as the mass moved ; and, consequently, the acceleration is independent of the mass. If, by any combination, the moving force can be diminished whilst the mass remains unchanged, there will be a corresponding diminution in the acceleration. This object may be obtained by the combination represented in the figure. A represents a fixed pulley, mounted on a horizontal axis, in such a manner that the /TX friction shall be as small as possible ; W and W are unequal weights, attached to a flexible cord passing over the pulley. If we suppose the weight IFgreater than W\ the former will * descend and draw the latter up. If the dif- ference is very small, the motion will be very Fig. 99. slow, and if the instrument is nicely constructed, 154 MECHANICS. we may neglect all hurtful resistances as inap- preciable. Denote the masses of the weights ^_^^ W and IF', by m and m\ and the force of f -A- \ gravity, by g. The weight W is urged down- wards by the moving force mg, and this mo- tion is resisted by the moving force m'g. Hence, the entire moving force is equal to 3W* r w mg — m'g, or, (m — m')g, and the entire mass P5t , m moved, is m -f- m\ since the cord joining the weights is supposed inextensible. If we denote the accel eration by g', we shall have, from what was said at the beginning of this article, a' = ,g (83.) J m+ m! J v } By diminishing the difference between m and m\ we may make the acceleration as small as we please. It is plain that g' is constant; hence, the motion of TFis uniformly varied. wy~l 77c If we replace g by — — — } g, in Equations (73) and (74), 711/ ~\~ 771 they will make known the circumstances of motion of the body W. This principle is employed to illustrate the laws of falling bodies by means of Atwood's machine. Had the two weights under consideration been attached to the extremities of cords passing around a wheel and its axle, and in different directions, it might have been shown that the motion would be uniformly varied, when the mo- ment of either weight exceeded that of the other. The same principle holds good in the more complex combinations of pulleys, wheels and axles, &c. In practice, however, the hurtful resistances increase so rapidly, that even when the moving force remains constant, the velocity soon attains a maximum limit, after which the motion will be sensibly unifo- ,n. j; x a M P l k s. ]. Two weights of 5 lbs. and 4 lbs., respectively, are suspended from the extremities of a cord passing over a RECTILINEAR MOTION. 155 fixed pulley. What distance will each weight describe in the tirst second of time, what velocity will be generated in one second, and what will be the tension of the connecting cord ? SOLUTION. Since the masses are proportional to the weights, we shall have, q' = i— ^ q = - X 32- ft. = 3.574 ft. J 5 + 4 J 9 6 Hence, the velocity generated is 3.574 ft., and the space passed over is 1.787 ft. To find the tension of the string, denote it by x. The moving force acting upon the heavier body, is (5 — x)g, and the acceleration due to this force, ( — ^-)g\ the moving force acting upon the lighter body, /rvt ^.\ is (x— 4)g, and the corresponding acceleration, ( — - — W. But since the two bodies move together, these accelerations must be equal. Hence, /5 — x\ (X — 4\ (— > = (-r> ; .-. x — 4j lbs., the required tension. 2. A weight of 1 lb., hanging on a pulley, descends and drags a second weight of 5 lbs. along a horizontal plane. Neglecting hurtful resistances, to what will the accelerating force be equal, and through what spr.ee will the descending body move in the first second ? solution. The moving force is equal to 1 x , are each equal to 181 grains, and that the weight of the bar G, is 24 grains. Then will the acceleration be q' = 2 - g = 2 ft. ; y 362 + 24 J ' and since h = ^g'f, and v = g't (Art. 115), we shall have, for the case in question, h = t\ and v = 2t. If, in these equations, we make t =. 1 sec, we shall have h = 1, and v = 2. If we make t = 2 sec, we shall, in like manner, have h = 4, and « = 4. If we make t = 3 sec, we shall have A = 9, and v = 6, and so on. To verify these results experimentally, commencing with the first. The weight C is drawn up till it comes opposite the of the graduated scale, and the bar G is placed upon it. The weight thus set is held in its place by a spring. The ring E is set at 1 foot from the 0, and the stage JF] is set at 3 feet from the 0. When the pendulum reaches one of its extreme limits, the spring is pressed back, the weight (7, G descends, and as the pendulum completes its vibration, the bar G strikes the ring, and is retained. The acceleration then becomes 0, and the weight C moves on uniformly, with the velocity that it had acquired, in the first second ; and it will be observed that the weight C strikes the second stage just as the pendulum completes its second vibration. Had the stage F been st 1 at 5 feet from the 0, the weight would have reached it at the end of the third vibration of the pendulum. Had it been 7 feet from the 0, it would have reached it at the end of the fourth vibration, and so on. To verify the next result, we set the ring E at four feet 158 MECHANICS. from the 0, and the stage F at 8 feet from the 0, and pro- ceed as before. The ring will intercept the bar at the end of the first vibration, and the weight will strike the stage at the end of the second vibration, and so on. By making the weight of the bar less tnan 24 grains, the acceleration is diminished, and, consequently, the spaces and velocities correspondingly diminished. The results may be verified as before. Motion of Bodies on Inclined Planes. 119. If a body be placed on an inclined plane, and abandoned to the action of its own weight, it will either slide or roll down the plane, provided there be no friction between it and the plane. If the body is spherical, it will roll, and in this case the friction may be disregarded. Let the weight of the body be resolved into two components ; one perpendicular to the plane, and the other parallel to it. The plane of these components will be vertical, and it will also be perpendicular to the given plane. The effect of the first component will be counteracted by the resistance of the plane, whilst the second component will act as a constant force, continually urging the body down the plane. The force beins constant, the body will have a uniformly varied motion, and Equations (67) and (08) will be immediately applicable. The acceleration will be found by projecting the acceleration due to gravity upon the inclined plane. Let AP represent a section of the inclined plane made by a vertical plane taken perpendicular to the given plane, and let P be the centre of gravity of a body resting on the given plane. Let PQ repre- sent the acceleration due to gravity, denoted by #, and let PR be the Fig. 101. component of y, which is parallel to AB, denoted by ff\ PS being the normal component. Denote the angle that AB makes with the horizontal plane by a. Then, since PQ is perpendicular to PC, and QP to RECTILINEAR MOTION. 159 AB, the angle BQP is equal to ABC, or to a. Hence we have, from the right-angled triangle BQB, g' = gmna. But the triangle AB C is right-angled, and, if we denote its height A C by h, and its length AB by I, we shall have sina = — , which, being substituted above, gives, *' = f (84.) This value of g' is the value of the acceleration due to the moving force. Substituting it for f in Equations (67) and (68), we have, s = S ' + v't + ( f l e- If the body starts from rest at A, taken as the origin of spaces, then will v' = and -s' = 0, giving, V = ft (85.) •-■£'■ • • (««•) To find the time required for a body to move from the top to the bottom of the plane, make 8 =■ I, in (86) ; there will result, i --fit , .. i-y^S * (87 ° Hence the time varies directly as the length, and inversely as the square root of the height. For two planes having the same height, but different lengths, the radical factor of the value of t will remain con- 160 MECHANICS. stant. Hence, tne limes required for a body to move down any two planes having the same height, are to each other as their lengths. To determine the velocity with which a body reaches the bottom of the plane, substitute for t, in Equation (85) its value taken from Equation (86). We shall have, after reduction, v = ^/2gh. But this is the velocity due to the height h (Art. 115). Hence, the velocity generated in a body whilst moving down any inclined plane, is equal to that generated in falling freely through the height of the plane. EXAMPLES. 1. An inclined plane is 10 feet long and 1 foot high. How long will it take for a body to move from the top to the bottom, and what velocity will it acquire in the descent ? SOLUTION. We have, from Equation (8V), t = lx. gh substituting for I its value 10, and for h its value 1, we have, t — 2\ seconds nearly. From the formula v — \/2gh, we have, by making h = 1, V = -v/64.33 = 8.02 ft. 2. How far will a body descend from rest in 4 seconds, on an inclined plane whose length is 400 feet, and whose height is 300 fee* ? Ans. 103 t't. 3. How long will it take for a body to descend 100 feet on a plane whose length is 150 feet, and whose height is 00 feet? Ans. 3.9 sec KECTILINEAR MOTION. 161 4. There is an inclined railroad track, 2£ miles in length, whose inclination is 1 in 35. What velocity will a car attain, in running the whole length of the road, by its own weight, hurtful resistances being neglected ? Am. 155.75 ft., or, 106.2 m. per hour. 5. A railway train, having a velocity of 45 miles per hour, is detached from the locomotive on an ascending grade of 1 in 200. How far, and for what time, will the train continue to ascend the inclined plane ? SOLUTION. We find the velocity to be 66 ft. per second. Hence, 66 = y/'lgh ; or, h = 67.7 ft. for the vertical height. Hence, 67.7 X 200 = 13,540 ft., or, 2.5644 m., the distance which the train will proceed. We have, t = I \I — t = 410.3 sec, or, 6 min. 50.3 sec, foi the time required to come to rest. 6. A body weighing 5 lbs. descends vertically, and draws a weight of 6 lbs. up an inclined plane of 45°. How far will the first body descend in 10 seconds ? SOLUTION. The moving force is equal to 5 — 6 sin 45° ; and, conse. sequently, the acceleration, 5-6sin45° .757 ^ 0010 j = ____ = _ = .068818; .-. s = \g'f = 3.4409 ft. Arts. Motion of a Body down a succession of Inclined Planes. 120. If a body start from the top of an inclined plane, w T ith an initial velocity v\ it will reach the bottom with a velocity equal to the initial velocity, increased by that due to the height of the plane. This velocity, called the terminal velocity, will, therefore, be equal to that which the body 162 MECHANICS. would have acquii =d by falling freely throngh a height equal to that due to the initial velocity, increased by that of the plane. Hence, if a body start from a state of rest at A, and, after having passed over one inclined plane AB, enters upon a second plane B C, without loss of velocitv, it will reach » ' Fig. 102. the bottom of the second plane with the same velocity that it would have acquired by falling freely through DC, the sum of the heights of the two planes. Were there a succession of inclined planes, so ar- ranged that there would be no loss of velocity in passing from one to another, it might be shown, by a similar course of reasoning, that the terminal velocity would be equal to that due to the vertical distance of the terminal point below the point of starting. By a course of reasoning entirely analagous to that em- ployed in discussing the laws of motion of bodies projected vertically upwards, it might be shown that, if a body were projected upwards, in the direction of the lower plane, with the terminal velocity, it would ascend along the several planes to the top of the highest one, where the velocity would be reduced to 0. The body would then, under the action of its own weight, retrace its path in such a manner that the velocity at every point in descending would be the same as in ascending, but in a contrary direction. The time occupied by the body in passing over any part of its path in descending, would be exactly equal to that occupied in passing over the same portion in ascending. In the preceding discussion, we have supposed that there is no loss of velocity in passing from one plane to another. To ascertain under what circumstances this condition will be fulfilled, let us take the two planes AB and BC. Prolong BG upwards, and denote the angle ABE, by 9. Denote the velocity of the 1m><1v on reaching B, by v'. Let v' be resolved into two components, one in the direction of BC, and the other at right angles to it. The effect of the latter TEKIODIC MOTION. 163 will bo destroyed by the resistance of the plane, and the former will be the effective velocity in the direction of the plane B C. • From the rule for decomposition of velocities, we have, for the effective component of v\ the value v' cos?. Hence, the loss of velocity due to change of direction, is v' — v' cos$ ; or, v'{\ — cos?), which is equal to v' ver-sinr. But when cp is infinitely small, its versed-sine is 0, and there will be no loss of velocity. Hence, the loss of velocity due to change of direction will always be 0, when the path of the body is a curved line. This principle is general, and may be enunciated as follows : When a body is constrained to describe a curvilinear path, there will be no loss of velo- city in consequence of the change in direction of the body^s motion. Periodic Motion. t 121. Periodic motion is a kind of variable motion, in which the spaces described in certain equal periods of time are equal. This kind of motion is exemplified in the pheno- mena of vibration, of which there are two cases. 1st. Rectilinear vibration. Theory indicates, and experi- ment confirms the fact, that if a particle of an elastic fluid be slightly disturbed from its place of rest, and then aban- doned, it will be urged back by a force, varying directly as its distance from the position of equilibrium ; on reaching this position, the particle will, by virtue of its inertia, pass to the other side, again to be urged back, and so on. To determine the time required for the particle to pass from one extreme position to the opposite one and back, let us denote the displacement at any time t by s, and the accelera- tion due to the restoring force by

~ 2n ' sds > whence, by integration, * = »v + o = -+. The velocity v will be when s is greatest possible ; denoting this value of s by a, we shall have, ?iW +(7=0; whence, C = - n*a*. Substituting this value of G in the preceding equation, it becomes, v 2 = -j-j = n 2 (a 2 — s 2 ) ; whence, ndt = — - . (88.) dt 2 Integrating the last equation, we have, Va a — ?it+ C = sin- 1 - . . . . (89.) a Taking the integral between the limits s = -f- a and s = — a, and denoting the corresponding time by ±r t being the time of a double vibration, we have, Inr = x ; whence, r = — • The value of or ' t:t" :: ^: V9 - (^) t v g That is, the times of vibration of the same simple pen- dulum, at two different places, are to each other inversely as the square roots of the forces of gravity at the two places. If we suppose the times of vibration to be the same, and the force of gravity to vary, the lengths will vary also, and we shall have, t = if \ / - , and t = if \ / — • Equating these values and squaring, we have, I v t _ ,./ J or, 1:1': : 9 '■ : 9' 9 9 (99.) That is, the lengths of simple pendulums which vibrate in equal times at different places, are to each other as the forces of gravity at those places. Vibrations of equal duration are called isochronal. The Compound Pendulum. 124. A compound pendulum is a heavy body free to oscillate about a horizontal axis. This axis is called the axis of suspension. The straight line drawn from the centre of gravity of the pendulum perpendicular to the axis of suspension is called the axis of the pendulum. In all practical applications, the pendulum is so taken that the plane through the axis of suspension and the centre of gravity divides it symmetrically. Were the elementary particles of the pendulum entirely disconnected, but constrained to remain at invariable dis- tances from the axis of suspension, we should have a col- lection of simple pendulums. Those at equal distances from 8 170 MECHANICS. the axis would vibrate in equal times; those unequally distant from it would vibrate in unequal times. Those particles which are at the same distance from the axis of suspension lie upon the surface of a cylinder, whose axis coincides with the axis of suspension, and we may, with- out at all affecting the time of vibration, suppose them all to be concentrated at the point in which the cylinder cuts the axis of the pendulum. If we suppose the same to be done for each of the concentric cylinders, Ave may regard the pendu- lum as made up of a succession of heavy points, a, b, . . . p, k, lying on the axis, firmly connected with each other and with the point of suspension C. The particles a, b, &c, nearest to C will tend to accelerate the motion of the entire pendu- , lum, whilst those most remote, as p, k, That is, the distance from the axis of suspension to the axis of oscillation is equal to the moment of inertia, taken with respect to the axis of susjiension, divided by the moment of the mass, taken icith respect to the same axis. Let the axis of oscillation be taken as an axis of suspen- sion, and denote its distance from the new axis of oscillation by I'. The distances of a, b . . . p, k, from 0, will be I — r, I — r ', &c, and the distance G will be / — h From the principle just enunciated, we shall have, _ Z[ W (*-r)-] ' _ M(l-k) PERIODIC MOTION. 173 Or, performing the operation of squaring and reducing, _ Z(?nV- - 2mrl + mr*) _ 2(mP) - 22(mrl) -f 2(mr*) ~ M(l - k) " _ 31(1 -k) ' But I is constant, hence 2(?nl n -) = 2(m) x l 2 = 3fP, also, 22(?nrl) = 22(mr) X I = 2Mkl\ from Equation (102) we have, 2(mr 2 ) = 3Ikl. Substituting these values in the preceding equation, we have, _ 3IP - 2MM + Mkl _ 31(1 - k)l ~ 31(1 - k) - M(l - k) ' or, r = i (103.) Hence, it follows that the axes of suspension and oscilla- tion are convertible / that is, if either be taken as the axis of suspension, the other to ill be the axis of oscillation, and the reverse. This property of the compound pendulum has been em- ployed to determine experimentally the length of the seconds pendulum, and the value of the force of gravity at different places on the surface of the earth. A straight bar of iron CD, is provided with two knife- edge axes, A and B, of hardened steel, at right angles to the axis of the bar, and having their edges turned towards each other. These axes are so placed that their plane will pass through the axis of the bar. The pendulum thus constructed is suspended on horixontal plates of polished agate, and allowed to vibrate about each axis in turn till, by filing away one of the ends of the bar, the times of vibration about the two axes are made equal. The distance AB is then equal to the length of the „ equivalent simple pendulum ; that is, of a simple pendulum which will vibrate in the same time as the bai about either axis. 171 MECHANICS. To employ the pendulum thus adjusted to find the length of a simple seconds pendulum at any place, the pendulum is carefully suspended, and allowed to vibrate through a very small angle ; the number of vibrations is counted, and the time occupied is carefully noted by means of a well-regulated chronometer. The entire time divided by the number of vibrations performed, gives the time of a single vibration. The distance between the axes is carefully measured by an accurate scale of equal parts, which gives the length of the corresponding simple pendulum. To find the length of the simple seconds pendulum, we then make use of Proportion (97), substituting in it for t' and V the values just found, and for £, 1 second; the only remaining quantity in the propor- tion is I, which may be found by solving the proportion. This value of I is the required length of the simple seconds pendulum at the place where the observation is made. In making the observations, a variety of precautions must be taken, and several corrections applied, the explanation of which does not fall within the scope of this treatise. It is only intended to point out the general method of proceed- ing. By a long series of carefully conducted experiments, it has been found that the length of a simple seconds pen- dulum in the Tower of London is 3.2616 ft., or 39.13921 in. By a similar course of proceeding, the length of the seconds pendulum has been determined for a great number of places on the earth's surface, at different latitudes, and from these results the corresponding values of the force of gravity at those points have been determined according to the following principle : Fiom Equation (95), which is, t = *\/~~'> we fi n0 ^ by solving with respect to g, and making 1=1, o = *■*. From this equation the value of g may be found at different places, by simply substituting for I the length of the PERIODIC MOTION. 175 seconds pendulum at ihose places. In this manner, the value m g is found for a great number of places in different latitudes, and from these values the form of the earth's surface may be computed. It has been ascertained in this manner that if the force of gravity at any point on the earth's surface be denoted by g, the force of gravity at a point whose latitude is 45°, by g\ and the latitude of the place where the force of gravity is g\ by /, we shall have, g — g\\ — .002695cos2Z). PEACmCAL APPLICATIONS OF THE PENDULUM. 125. One of the most important of the applications of the pendulum is to regulating the n^ption of clocks. A clock consists of a train of wheel work, the last wheel of the train connecting with the upper extremity of a pendulum- rod by a piece of mechanism called an escapement. The wheelwork is maintained in motion by means of a descending Aveight, or by the elastic force of a coiled spring, and the wheels are so arranged that one tooth of the last wheel in the train escapes from the upper end of the pendulum-rod at each vibration of the pendulum, or at each beat. The number of beats is registered and rendered visible on a dial-plate by means of indices, called the hands of the clock. On account of the expansion and contraction of the ma- terial of which the pendulum is composed, the length of the pendulum is liable to continual variation, which gives rise to an irregularity in the times of vibration of the pendulum. To obviate this inconvenience, and to render the times of vibration perfectly uniform, several ingenious devices have been resorted to, giving rise to what are called compensating pendulums. We shall indicate two of the most important of these combinations, observing that all of the remaining ones are nearly the same in principle, differing only in the modes of application. 176 MECHANICS. Graham's Mercurial Pendulum. 126. Graham's mercurial pendulum consists of a rod oi steel about 42 inches long, branched towards its lower end, so as to embrace a cylindrical glass vessel V or 8 inches deep, and having 6.8 in. of this depth filled with mercury. The exact quantity of mercury being dependent on the weight and expansibility of the other parts oi the pendulum, must be determined by experiment in each individual case When the temperature increases, the steel rod is lengthened, and, at the same time, the mercury expanding, rises in the cylinder. When the temperature decreases, the steel bar is shortened, and the mercury falls in the cylinder. By a proper adjustment of the quantity of mercury, the effect of the lengthening or shortening of the rod is exactly coun- terbalanced by the rising or falling of the centre of gravity of the mercury, arm the axis of oscillation is kept at an invariable distance from the axis of suspension. Harrison's Gridiron Pendulum. 12 "7. Harrison's gridiron pendulum consists of five rods of steel and four of brass, placed alter- nately with each other, the middle rod, or that from which the bob is suspended, being of steel. These rods are connected by cross-pieces in such a manner that, whilst the expansion of the steel rods tends to elongate the pendulum, or lower the bob, the expansion of the brass rods tends to shorten the pendulum, or raise the bob. By duly proportioning the sizes and lengths of the bars, the axis of oscillation may be main- tained, by the combination, at an invariable dis- tance from the axis of suspension. From what has preceded, it follows that whenever the dis- tance from the axis of* oscillation to the axis of suspension remains invariable, the limes of vibration must be abso- lutely equal at the same place. The pendulums just de- t Fig. 107. PERIODIC MOTION. 177 scribed are principally used for astronomical clocks, where great accuracy and great uniformity in the measure of time is indispensable. Basis of a system of Weights and Measures. 128. The pendulum is of further importance, in a prac- tical point of view, in furnishing the standard of comparison which has been made use of as a basis of the English system of weights and measures. The length of the seconds pendu- lum at any place, can always be found, and it must always be the same at that place. We have seen that this length was determined, with great accuracy, in the Tower of Lon- don, to be 3.2616 ft. It has been decreed by the British Government, that the 3,27n e tn P art °f tne l en g tn °f tne simple seconds pendulum, in the Tower of London, shall be regarded as a standard foot. From this, by multiplication and division, every other unit of lineal measure may be de- rived. By constructing squares and cubes upon the linear units, we at once arrive at the units of area and of volume. It has further been decreed, that a cubic foot of distilled water, at the temperature of maximum density, shall be re- garded as weighing 1000 standard ounces. This fixes the ounce ; and by multiplication and division, all other units of weight may be derived. This system enables us to refer to the original standard, when, from any circumstances, doubt may exist as to the accuracy of standard measures. Even should every vestige of a standard be swept from existence, they might be per- fectly restored, by the process above indicated. The American system of weights and measures is adopted from that of Great Britain, and is, in all respects, the same as that above described. EXAMPLES. 1. The length of a seconds pendulum is 39.13921 hi. If it be shortened 0.130464 in., how many vibrations will be gained in a day of 24 hours ? 8* ITS MECHANICS. SOLUTION. The times of vibration of two pendulums at the same place, are to each other as the square roots of their lengths (Eq. 97). Hence, the number of vibrations made in any given time, are inversely proportional to the square roots of their lengths. If, therefore, Ave denote the number of vi- brations gained in 24 hours, or 86400 seconds, by a-, we shall have, 86400 : 86400 -f x : : ^39-008747 : v/39.13921 ; or, 86400 : 86400 -f x : : 6.2457 : 6.2561. Whence, x — 144, nearly. Ans. 2. A seconds pendulum being carried to the top of a mountain, was observed to lose 5 vibrations per day of 86400 seconds. Required the height of the mountain, reckoning the radius of the earth at 4000 miles. SOLUTION. The squares of the times of vibration, at any two points, are inversely proportional to the forces of gravity at those points (Eq. 98). But the forces of gravity at the same points are inversely as the squares of their distances from the centre of the earth. Hence, the times of vibration are proportional to the distances of the points from the cen- tre of the earth; and, consequently, the number of vibra- tions in any given time, as 24 hours, for example, will be inversely as those distances. If, therefore, we denote the height of the mountain in miles by ic, we shall have, 86400 : 86405 : : 4000 : 4000 + x. Whence, x = f£$$! = 0.2315 miles, or, 1222 feet. Ans. 3. What is the time of vibration of a pendulum whose length is GO inches, when the force of gravity is reckoned at 32£ ft? Ans. 1.2387 sec. PERIODIC MOTION. 179 4. How many vibrations will a pendulum 36 inches in length make in one minute, the force of gravity being the same as before ? A?is. 62.53. 5. A pendulum is found to make 43170 vibrations in 12 hours. How much must it be shortened that it may beat seconds ? SOLUTION. We shall have, as in Example 1st, 43170 : 43200 : : -v/39.13921 : -y/ 39 - 13921 + x - Whence, x = 0.0544 in. Ans. 6. In a certain latitude, the length of a pendulum vi- brating seconds is 39 inches. What is the length of a pen- dulum vibrating seconds, in the same latitude, at the height of 21000 feet above the first station, the radius of the earth being 3960 miles? Ans. 38.9218 in. 7. If a pendulum make 40000 vibrations in 6 hours, at the level of the sea, how many vibrations will it make in the same time, at an elevation of 10560 feet above the same point, the radius of the earth being 3960 miles? Ans. 39979.8. Centre of Percussion. 129. The point O, Fig. 108, is a point at which, if the entire mass were concentrated, and the im- pressed forces applied to it, the effect produced would be in nowise different from what actu- ally obtains. Were an impulse applied at this , point, capable of generat ng a quantity of mo- /' tion equal and directly opposed to the resul- /-.. tant of all the quantities of motion of the ' """ particles of the body, at any instant, the body Fig. ios. would evidently be brought to a state of rest without imparting any shock to the axis of suspension. The direction of the impulse remaining the same as before, 180 MECHANICS. no matter what may be its intensity, there will stiL be no shock on the axis. This point is, therefore, called the centre of percussion. We may then define the centre of percus- sion to be that point of a body restrained by an axis, at which, if the body be struck in a direction perpendicular to a plane passed through this point and the axis of suspension, n > -hock will be imparted to the axis. It is a matter of common observation that, if a rod held in the hand be struck at a certain point, the hand will not feel the blow, but if it be struck at any other point of its length, there will be a shock felt, the intensity of which will depend upon the intensity of the blow, and upon the distance of its point of application from the first point. Moment of Inertia. 130. The moment of inertia of a body with respect to an axis, is the ahjebraic sum of the products obtained by multiplying the mass of each elementary particle by the square of its distance from the axis. Denoting the moment of inertia with respect to any axis, by A", the mass of any element of the body, by m, and its distance from the axis, by r, we have, from the definition, K = Z(mr) .... (104.) The moment of inertia evidently varies, in the same body, according to the position of the axis. To investigate the law of variation, let AB represent any sec- tion of the body by a plane perpendicular to the axis; C, the point in which this plane cuts the axis; and G, the point in which it cuts a parallel axis through the centre of gravity. Let P be any element of the body, whose mass is ?/?, and denote 7'(7by i CG by k. From the triangle CPG, accordin Trigonometry, we have, r- = * a + A; 3 — 2skcosCGP 1 ^ B Fig. 109. PG by v, and i principle c f MOMENT OF INERTIA. 181 Substituting in (104), and separating the terms, we have, K — 2(ms n -) + Kmtf) — 2I(mskcosCGP). Or, since k is constant, and l(m) = M z the mass of the entire body, we have, K '= 2{ms*) + Mlt - 2kl(mscosCGP). But scosCGP = GIT, the lever arm of the mass -/i, with respect to the axis through the centre of gravity. Hence, 2(ms cosCGP), is the algebraic sum of the mo- ments of all the particles of the body with respect to the axis through the centre of gravity ; but from the principle of moments, this is equal to 0. Hence, K= 2(ms a ) + Mk* . . . (105.) The first term of the second member of (105), is the ex- pression for the moment of inertia, with respect to the axis through the centre of gravity. Hence, the moment of inertia of a body with respect to any axis, is equal to the moment of inertia tcith respect to a parallel axis through the centre of gravity, plus the mass of the body into the square of the distance between the two axes. The moment of inertia is, therefore, the least possible, when the axis passes through the centre of gravity. If any number of parallel axes be taken at equal distances from the centre of gravity, the moment of inertia with respect to each, will be the same. The moment of inertia of a body with respect to any axis, may be determined experimentally as folloAvs. Make the axis horizontal, and allow the body to vibrate about it, as a compound pendulum. Find the time of a single vibra- tion, and denote it by t. This value of t, in Equation (95), makes known the value of I. Determine the centre of gravity by some one of the methods given, and denote its 182 MECHANICS. distance from the axis, by k. Find the mass of the body (Art. 11), and denote it by M. We have, from Equation (102), MM = Z(mr-) = K. Substituting for M, Z, and A-, the values already found, and the value of A" will be the moment of inertia, with res- pect to the assumed axis. Subtract from this the value of Jfk', and the remainder will be the moment of inertia with respect to a parallel axis through the centre of gravity. The moment of inertia of a homogeneous body of regular figure, is most readily found by means of the calculus A few examples of the application of the calculus to finding the moment of inertia of bodies are subjoined. Application of the Calculus to determine the Moment of Inertia. 131. To render Formula (104) suitable to the application of the calculus, we have simply to change the sign of sum- mation, 2, to that of integration, /, and to replace in by dM, and r by x. This gives, E = ftfdM (106.) Example 1. To find the moment of inertia of a rod or bar of uniform thickness with respect to an axis through its centre of gravity and perpendicular to the length of the rod. Let AB represent the rod, G its centre of gravity, and E any element contained by planes at right angles to the [2 jp length of the rod and infinitely A , M near each other. Denote the mass of the rod by 3/, its length, by 2 7 , the distance GE, by #, and R 110 the thickness of the element A 7 , by dx. Then will the mass of the element E be equal to MOMENT OF INERTIA. 183 M 21 dx. Substituting this for d3f, in Equation (106), and integrating between the limits — I and -f I, we have, + i *M K = / -r x'dx = 31^- J 21 — i For any parallel axis whose distance from G is (7, we shall have, r (| + tf (107.) These two formulas are entirely independent of the breadth of the filament in the direction of the axis DC. They will, therefore, hold good when the filament AB is replaced by the rectangle KF. In this case, M becomes the mass of the rectangle, 21 the length of the rectangle, and d the distance of the centre of gravity of the rectangle from the axis parallel to one of its ends. Example 2. To find the moment of inertia of a thin circular plate about one of its diameters. Let A CB represent the plate, AB the axis, and CD' any element parallel to AB. Denote the radius 0(7, by r, the distance OE, by jb, the breadth of the element EF, by dx, and its length D (7, by 2y. If Ave denote the entire mass of the plate, by M, the mass of the element 2xi dx CD will be equal to JLT-~-; or, we have, since y — yr — ar dM = M 2yfl *r' dx. Substituting in Equation (106), we have, 184 MECHANICS. M ,J K=f-- l .x>(r>-x>) dx. Integrating by the aid of Formulas A and JB (Integral Calculus), and taking the integral between the limits x = — r, and x = + r, we find, K = M 4 ' and for a parallel axis at a distance from AB equal to d, JT' = Jf(^ + ^) (108.) Example 3. To find the moment of inertia of a circular plate with respect to an axis through its centre perpendicular to the face of the plate. Let the dimensions and mass of the plate be the same as before. Let KL be an elemetary ring whose radius is x, and whose breadth dx. Then will the mass of the elementary ring be equal to M 2txdx or dM — iMxdx Substituting this in Equation (106), and taking the integral between the limits x — 0, and x = r, we have, ^ r 23fx s dx Mr' o For a parallel axis at a distance d from the primitive axis, JT' = Jf (y + <*») (109.) MOMENT OF INERTIA. 185 Example 4. To find the moment of inertia of a circular ring, such as maybe generated by revolving a rectangle about a line parallel to one of its sides, taken with respect to an axis through the centre of gravity and perpendi- cular to the face of the ring. This case differs but little from the preceding. Denote the inner radius by r, the outer radius by r\ and the mass of the ring by 31. If we take, as before, an elementary ring whose radius is sp, and whose breadth is dx, we shall have for its mass, Fig. 113. dM = M 2xdx Substituting in Equation (106), and integrating between the limits r, and r\ we have, A = f M ^—p = M -^—) = M ~— For a parallel axis at a distance from the primitive axis equal to c?, we have. r' 2 + r 1 -> = M(^L +( r) (no..; If in these values of K and K' we make r = 0, we shall deduce the results of the last example. Example 5. To find the moment of inertia of a right cylinder with respect to an axis through the centre of gravity and perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder. Let AB represent the cylinder, CD the axis through c E iSo* MECHANIC8. its centre of gravity, and E an ele- ment of the cylinder between two planes perpendicular to the axis, and distant from each other, by dx. De- note the length of the cylinder by 2/, the area of its cross section by ^r 2 , Ficr U4 r being the radius of the base; the distance of the section E from the centre of gravity, by x, and the mass of the cylinder, by M. dx The mass of the element E is equal to M-* Its moment of inertia with respect to its diameter parallel to ^t^ • ^ Mdx r 3 ,_ , _ CD, is equal to — — x — (Example 2), and with respect to CD parallel to it, — — I h x M • Integrating this expression between the limits x = — /, and x — -f- I, we have, *=7*(f +"■)*=<+ J) For an axis parallel to the primitive one, and at a distance from it equal to d, Centre of Gyration. 132. The centre of gyration of a body with respect to an axis, is a point at which, if the entire mass be concen- trated, its moment of inertia will remain unchanged. The distance from this point to the axis is called the radius of gyration* MOMENT OF INERTIA. 187 Let M denote the mass of the body, and k' its radius of gyration ; then will the moment of inertia of the concen tinted mass with respect to the axis, be equal to Mk' 2 ; but this must, by definition, be equal to the moment of inertia with respect to the same axis, or 2(wir 2 ) ; hence, That is, the radius of gyration is equal to the square root of the quotient obtained by dividing the moment of inertia with respect to the same axis, by the entire ?nass. Since M is constant for the same body, it follows that the radius of gyration will be the least possible when the moment of inertia is the least possible, that is, when the axis passes through the centre of gravity. This minimum radius is called the principal radius of gyration. If we denote the principal radius of gyration by &, we shall have, from the examples of Article (131), the following results: Example 1, . k' = v/-r + dr ; k = I y^J /r 2 r Example 2, . k' = \I — -f d 2 ; k = - Example 3, . k' = \J — -j- d* ; k = r-y/J. /r' 2 -f- r 2 /r' 2 4- r 2 + d 2 ; k = \f — — — Example^ . ^ = y/£ + | + # ; k = yjj + 188 MECHANICS. CHAPTER VI. CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. Motion of Projectiles. 133. If a body is projected obliquely upwards in vacuum, and then abandoned to the force of gravity, it will be continually deflected from a rectilinear path, and, after describing a curvilinear trajectory, will finally reach the horizontal plane from which it started. The starting point is called the point of projection ; the distance from the point of projection to the point at which the projectile again reaches the horizontal plane, through the point of projection, is called the range, and the time occupied is called the time of flight. The only forces to be considered, are the initial im- pulse and the force of gravity. Hence, the trajectory will lie in a vertical plane passing through the line of direction of the initial impulse. Let CAB rep- resent this plane, A the point of projection, AB the range, and AC a vertical line through A. Take AB and AC as co-ordinate axes; denote the angle of projection DAB, by a, and the velocity due to the initial impulse, by v. Resolve the velocity v into two com- ponents, one in the direction A C, and the other in the direction AB. We shall have, for the former, rsina, and, for the latter, v cost. The velocities, and, consequently, the spaces described in the direction of the co-ordinate axes, will (Art. 18) be en- tirely independent of each other. Denote the space Fig. 115. OURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 189 described in the direction A (7, in any arbitrary time £, by y. The circumstances of motion in this direction, are those of a body projected vertically upwards with an initial velocity v sina, and then continually acted upon by the force of gravity. Hence, Equation (78) is applicable. Making, in that equation, h = y, and v' = v sina, we have, y = vsmat — \gf , . . . (113.) Denote the space described in the direction of the axis AB, in any arbitrary time t, by x. The only force acting in the direction of this axis, is the component of the initial impulse. Hence, the motion in the direction ot the axis of x will be uniform, and Equation (55) is applicable. Making s = x, and v = v cosa, we have, x = v cosa t ( 114> ) If we suppose t to be the same in Equations (113) and (114), they will be simultaneous, and, taken together, will make known the position of the projectile at any instant. From (114), we have, t - V COSa which, substituted in (113), gives, sina qx* , y = — *- 5-r—r • • • ( 115 -) cosa 2u 2 COS a x an equation which is entirely independent of t. It, there- fore, expresses the relation between x and y for any value of t whatever, and is, consequently, the equation of the tra- jectory. Equation (115) is the equation of a parabola whose axis is vertical. Hence, the required trajectory is a parabola. 190 MECHANICS. To find an expression for the range, make y = 0, in (115), and deduce the corresponding value of x. Placing the value of y equal to 0, we have, sina ax* cosa 2y 2 cos-a 2y 2 sina cosa .*. x = 0, and x = • The first value of x corresponds to the point of projection, and the second is the value of the range, AB. From trigonometry, we have, 2sina cosa = sin2a. If we denote the height due to the initial velocity, by A, we shall have, v* — 2gh. Substituting these in the second value of ic, and denoting the range by r, we have, r = 2Asin2a ( 116.) The greatest value of r will correspond to the value a = 45°, in which case, 2a — 90°, and sin 2a = 1. Hence, we have, for the greatest range, r = 2h. # That is, it is equal to twice the height due to the initio:* velocity. If, in (116), we replace a by 90° — a, we shall have, r — 2Asin(180° —2a) = 2A sin2a, the same value as before. Hence, we conclude that there are two angles of projection, complements of each other, CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 191 which give the same range. The trajectories in the two cases are not the same, as may be shown by substituting the values of a, and 90° — «, in Equation (115). The greater angle of projection gives a higher elevation, and, conse- quently, the projectile descends more vertically. It is for this reason that the gunner selects the greater of the two angles of elevation when he desires to crush an object, and the lesser one when he desires to batter, or overturn the object. If a = 90°, the value of r becomes 0. That is, if a body be projected vertically upwards, it will return to the point of projection. To find the time of flight, make x = r, in Equation (114), and deduce the corresponding value of t. This gives, t = V COS* (117.) The range being the same, the time of flight will be greatest when a is greatest. Equation (114) also gives the time required for the body to describe any distance in the direction of the horizontal line AB. In Equation (117) there are four quantities, t, r, zyand a, and from it, if any three are given, the remaining one may be determined. As an application of the principles just deduced, let it be required to determine the angle of projection, in order that the projectile may strike a point II, at a horizontal distance AG = x' from the point of projection, and at a height Gil = y' above it. Since the point H lies on the Fig. lie. trajectory, its co-ordinates must satisfy the equation of the curve, giving y' — a;' tana 9* 2v'cos , a 192 MECHANICS. From trigonometry, we have, 1 1 cos a = sec 2 a 1 4- tan 2 a Substituting this in the preceding equation, we have* after clearing of fractions, 2v 2 y' = 2uVtana — gx n {\ + tai\ 2 a) ; or, transposing and reducing, 2u 2 2i>V + gx' 2 tan 2 a — — - tana — — gx gx* Hence, v* / v* 2»V tana = — r ± \/ ~rT* gx' V g'x 3 g + ax» gx' -" V 4A 2 - 4Ay', the point (#', y'), wtII be without this parabola, the values of tana will both be imaginary, and there will be no angle under which the point can be struck. B' 21l A. 2)i Fig. 117. Let the parabola B'LB represent the curve whose equa- tion is sb" = 4A 2 - ±hy'. Conceive it to be revolved about AL, as an axis generat- ing a paraboloid of revolution. Then, from what has preced- ed, we conclude, first, that every point lying within the surface may be reached from A, with a given initial velocity, under two different angles of projection ; second, that every point lying on the surface can be reached, but only by a sin- gle angle of projection ; thirdly, that no point lying without the surface can be reached at all. If we suppose a body to be projected horizontally from an elevated point A, the trajectory will be made known by Equation (115) by sim- ply making a = ; whence, sina = 0, and cos* = 1. Substituting and reduc- ing, we have, y = - g -- 9 (119.) Fig. 118 194 MECHANICS. For every value of #, y is negative, which shows that every point of the trajectory lies below the horizontal line through the point of projection. If we suppose ordinates to be estimated positively downwards, we shall have, y=g .... (120.) To find the point at which the trajectory will reach any horizontal plane B C, whose distance below the point A is A', we make y = h\ in- (120), whence, x = BC = vJ— . . . (121.) V g On account of the resistance of the air, the results of the preceding discussion will be greatly modified. They will, however, approach more nearly to the observed phenomena, as the velocity is diminished and the density of the projec- tile increased. The atmospheric resistance increases as the square of the velocity, and as the cross section of the pro- jectile exposed to the action of the resistance. In the air, it is found that, under ordinary circumstances, the maximum range is obtained by an angle of projection not for from 34°. E X A MPLE S. 1. "What is the time of flight of a projectile, when the angle of projection is 45°, and the range 6000 feet? SOLUTION. "When the angle of projection is 45°, the range is equal to twice the height due to the velocity of projection. Denot- ing this velocity by tf, we shall have, V 7 = 2gh = 2 X 321 x 3000 = 193000. CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 195 Whence, we find, v = 439.3 ft. From Equation (117), we have, r 6000 , rt „ t — — = ■— — — - = 19.3 sec. Ans, vcosa 439.3 cos4o° 2. What is the range of a projectile, when the angle of projection is 30°, and the initial velocity 200 feet ? Ans. 1076.9 ft. 3. The angle of projection under which a shell is thrown is 32°, and the range 3250 feet. What is the time of flight ? Ans. 11.25 sec, nearly. 4. Find the angle of projection and velocity of projec- tion of a shell, so that its trajectory shall pass through two points, the co-ordinates of the first being x = 1700 ft., y = 10 ft., and of the second, x = 1800 ft., y = 10 ft. SOLUTION. Substituting for x and y, in Equation (115), (1700,10), and (1800, 10), we have, 10 = 1700tan«-<«; 2y 2 cos 2 a and, 10 = ISOOtan* - £» 2trcosa Finding the value of — ^ — — from each of these equa- & 2v 2 COS 2 a ^ tions, and placing the two equal to each other, we have, after reduction, (18) 2 (l-170tana) = (I7) 2 (l-180tana). 196 MECHANICS. Whence, by solution, tana = -g^ = 0.01144, nearly ; .'. a = 39' 19". We have, from trigonometry, 1 1 374544 * . cos'a = = — = = .99987. sec'a l+tan 2 a 374593 Substituting for tana and cosa in the first equation their values as just deduced, we find, for ir 2 , «, = (1V00)V = 92961666 = 2cos 3 a(1700tana— 10) 18.89 Whence, v = 2218.3 ft. The required angle of projection is, therefore, 39'19", and the required initial velocity, 2218.3 ft. 4. At what elevation must a shell be projected with a velocity of 400 feet, that it may range 7500 feet on a plane which descends at an angle of 30 ? SOLUTION. The co-ordinates of the point at which the shell strikes, are x' — 7500cos30° = 6495 ; and y' — — 7500sin30° = — 3750. And denoting the height due to the velocity 400 ft., by h, we have, v 1 h - — = 2486 ft. 2<7 Substituting these values in the formula, 2A ± J\h % — ihy* — x" tana ~ ; i , CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 197 and reducing, we have, 4972 ± 4453 tana = 6495 Hence, a = 4° 34' 10", and 55° 25' 41". Ans. Centripetal and Centrifugal Forces. 134. Curvilinear motion can only result from the action of an incessant force, whose direction differs from that of the original impulse. This force is called the deflecting force, and may arise from one or more active forces, or it may result from the resistance offered by a rigid body, as when a ball is compelled to run in a curved gr©ove. What- ever may be the nature of the deflecting forces, we can always conceive them to be replaced by a single incessant force acting transversely to the path of the body. Let the deflecting force be resolved into two components, one nor- mal to the path of the body, and the other tangential to it. The latter force will act to accelerate or retard the motion of the body, according to the direction of the deflecting force ; the former alone is effective in changing the direction of the motion. The normal component is always directed towards the concave side of the curve, and is called the centripetal force. The body resists this force, by virtue of its inertia, and, from the law of inertia, the resistance must be equal and directly opposed to the centripetal force. This force of resistance is called the centrifugal force. Hence, we may define the centrifugal force to be the resistance which a body offers to a force which tends to deflect it from a rectilineal path. The centripetal and centrifugal forces taken together, are called central forces. Measure of the Centrifugal Force. 135. To deduce an expression for the measure of the centrifugal force, let us first consider the case of a single material point, which is constrained to move in a circular 198 MECHANICS. path by a force constantly directed towards the centre, as when a solid body is confined by a string and whirled around a fixed point. In this case, the tangential component of the deflecting force is always 0. There will be no loss of velo- city in consequence of a change of direction in the motion (Art. 120). Hence, the motion of the point will be uniform. Let ABD represent the path of the body, and V its centre. Suppose the circumference of the circle to be a regular polygon, having an infinite number of sides, of which AB is one ; and denote each of these sides by ds. When the body reaches A, it tends, by virtue of its inertia, to move in the direction of the tangent A T ; but, in consequence of the action of the centripetal force di- rected towards V, it is constrained to describe the side ds in the time dt. If we draw BO parallel to AT, it will be perpendicular to the diameter AD, and AC will represent the space through which the body has been drawn from the tangent, in the time dt. If we denote the acceleration due to the centripetal force by/, and suppose it to be constant during the time dt, we shall have, from Art. 114, AC= \fde (122.) From a property of right-angled triangles, we have, since AB = ds, ds' = AC X AD ; or, ds' = AC X 2r. Whence, AC 2r Substituting this value of AC in (122), and solving with respect to /, J ~ df r CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 199 But -^ = v 2 (Art. 113), in which v denotes the velocity of the moving point. Substituting in the preceding equa- tion, we have, v 2 /=JT ("«•) Here f is the acceleration due to the deflecting force; and, since this is exactly equal to the centrifugal force, we have the acceleration clue to the centrifugal force equal to the square of the velocity, divided by the radius of the circle. If the mass of the body be denoted by 31, and the entire centrifugal force by F, we shall have (Art. 24), „ Mo* F = — - 124.) r If we suppose the body to be moving on any curve what- ever, we may, whilst it is passing over any two consecutive elements, regard it as moving on the arc of the oscillatory circle to the curve which contains these elements ; and, fur- ther, we may regard the velocity as uniform during the infinitely small time required to describe these elements. The direction of the centrifugal force being normal to the curve, must pass through the centre of the oscillatory circle. Hence, all the circumstances of motion are the same as before, and Equations (123) and (124) will be applicable, provided r be taken as the radius of the curvature. Hence, we may enunciate the law of the centrifugal force as follows : The acceleration due to the centrifugal force is equal to the square of t/ie velocity of the body divided by the radius of curvature. The entire centrifugal force is equal to the acceleration, multiplied by the mass of the body. In the case of a body whirled around a centre, and re- strained by a string, the tension of the string, or the force ' 200 MECHANICS. exerted to bicak it, will be measured by the centrifugal force. The radius remaining constant, the tension will increase as the square of the velocity. Centrifugal Force at points of the Earth's Surface. 136. Let it be required to determine the centrifugal force at different points of the earth's surface, due to ,ts rotation on its axis. Suppose the earth spherical. Let A be any point on the surface, PQP a meridian section through A, PP the axis, FQ the equator, and AB perpendicular to PP\ the radius of the parallel of latitude through A. Denote the radius of the earth by r, the radius of the parallel through A by r', and the latitude of A, or the angle ACQ, by /. The time of revolution being the same for every point on the earth's surface, the velocities of Q and A will be to each other as their distances from the axis. Denoting these velocities by v and v', we have, v : v' : : r : r\ whence, vr' v' — — • r But, from the right-angled triangle CAB, since the angle at A is equal to ", we have, r' — r cosl. Substituting this value of r' in the value of i/, and re- ducing, we have, v' = v cosl. CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 201 If we denote the acceleration due to the centrifugal force at the equator by/* we shall have, Equation (123), v 1 f =, (125.) In like manner, if we denote the acceleration due to the centrifugal force at A, by/', we shall have, r Substituting for v' and r' their values, previously deduced, we get, r=^L (126.) Comparing Equations (125) and (126), we find, /:/':: 1 : cos?, .-. f =/cos* . (127.) That is, the centrifugal force at any point on the earth's surface is equal to the centrifugal force at the equator, multiplied by the cosine of the latitude of the place. Let AE, perpendicular to PP\ represent the value of /', and resolve it into two components, one tangential, and the other normal to the meridian section. Prolong CA, and draw AD perpendicular to it at A. Complete the rectangle ED on AE as a diagonal. Then will AD represent the tangential, and AE the normal component of /'. In the right-angled triangle AFE, the angle at A is equal to I. Hence, /sin 2? FE = AD = /'sin? = fcoslsinl = J —-— . ( 128.) AE = /'cos? = fcosH . . . . ( 129.) From (128), we conclude that the tangential component is 9* 202 MECHANICS. at the equator, goes on increasing till I = 45°, where it is a maximum ; then goes on decreasing till the latitude is 90° when it again becomes 0. The effect of the tangential component is to heap up the particles of the earth about the equator, and, were the earth in a fluid state, this process would go on till the effect of the tangential component was exactly counterbalanced by component of gravity acting down the inclined plane thus found, when the particles would be in a state of equili- brium. The higher analysis has shown that the form of equilibrium is that of an oblate spheroid, differing but slightly from that which our globe is found to possess by actual measurement. From Equation (129), we see that the normal component of the centrifugal force is equal to the centrifugal force at the equator multiplied by the square of the cosine of the latitude of the place. This component is directly opposed to gravity, and, con- sequently, tends to diminish the weight of all bodies on the surface of the earth. The value of this component is greatest at the equator, and diminishes towards the poles, where it becomes equal to 0. From the action of the normal component of the centrifugal force, and from the flattened form of the earth due to the tangential component bringing the polar regions nearer the centre of the earth, the measured force of gravity ought to increase in passing froni the equator towards the poles. This is found, by observation, to be the case. The radius of the earth at the equator is found, by measurement, to be about 3902.8 miles, which, multiplied by 2r, will give the entire circumference of the equator. If this be divided by the number of seconds in a day, 86400, we find the value of v. Substituting this value of v and that of r just given, in Equation (125), we should find, / = 0.1112 ft., for the measure of the centrifugal force at the equator. If CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 203 this be multiplied by the square of the cosine of the latitude of any place, we shall have the value of the normal com- ponent of the centrifugal force at that place. Centrifugal Force of Extended Masses. 136. We have supposed, in what precedes, the dimen sions of the body under consideration to be extremely small ; let us next examine the case of a body, of any dimensions whatever, constrained to revolve about a fixed axis, with which it is invariably connected. If we suppose this body to be divided into infinitely small elements, whose directions are parallel to the axis, the centrifugal force of each element will, from what has preceded, be equal to the mass of the element into the square of its velocity, divided by its dis- tance from the axis. If a plane be passed through the cen- tre of gravity of the body, perpendicular to the axis, we may, without impairing the generality of the result, suppose the mass of each element to be concentrated at the point in which this plane cuts the line of direction of the element. Let XCT be the plane through the centre of gravity of the body perpendicular to the axis of revolution, AB the section cut out a^^ of the body, or the projection of the body on* the plane, and C the point in which it cuts the axis. Take C as the origin of a system of rectangular axes, and let GX be the axis of A", c X CY the axis of Y, and let m be the Fig. 121 point at which the mass of one of these filaments is concentrated, and denote that mass by m. De- note the co-ordinates of m by x and y, its distance from C by r, and its velocity by v. The centrifugal force of the mass m will be equal to my 2 If we denote the angular velocity of the body by V\ the ^04 MECHANICS. velocity of tne point m will be equal to rl 77 , which, being substituted in the expression for the centrifugal force just deduced, gives mrV 7 *. Let this force be resolved into two components, respec- tively parallel to the axes CX and CY. We shall have, for these components, the expressions, mr V' 2 cosm CX, and mr V*smm CX. But from the figure, we have, cosm CX = - , and sinm CX = - • r r Substituting these values in the preceding expressions, and reducing, we have, for the two components, mx T 7 "' 2 , and my F"' 2 . In like manner, if we denote the masses of the remaining filaments by m', m", it, therefore, passes through the centre of gravity 0. Hence, we conclude, that the centrifugal force of an ex- tended mass, constr ined to revolve about a fixed axis, with which it is invariably connected, is the same as though the entire mass were concentrated at its centre of gravity. 206 MECHANICS. Pressure on the Axis. 137. The centrifugal force, passing through the centre of gravity and intersecting the axis, will exert its entire effect in creating a pressure upon the axis of revolution. By inspecting the equation, B ^ MV n r v we see that this pressure will increase with the mass, the angular velocity, and the distance of the centre of gravity from the axis. When the last distance is 0, that is, when ttie axis of revolution passes through the centre of gravity, there will he no pressure on the axis arising from the centri- fugal force, no matter what may he the mass of the body or its angular velocity. Such is the case of the earth revolving on its axis. Principal Axes. 138. Suppose the axis about which a body revolves to become free, so that the body can move in any direction. If that axis be not one of symmetry, it will be pressed un- equally in different directions by the centrifugal force, and will immediately alter its position. The body will for an instant rotate about some other line, which will immediately change its position, giving place to a new axis of rotation, which will instantly change its position, and so on, until an axis is reached which is pressed equally in all directions by the centrifugal forces of the elements. The body will then continue to revolve about this line, by virtue of its inertia, until the revolution is destroyed by the action of some extraneous force. Such an axis is called a principal axis of rotation. Every body has at least one such axis, and may have more. The axis of a cone or cylinder is a prin- cipal axis ; any diameter of a sphere is & principal axis; in short, any axis of symmetry of a homogeneous solid is a principal axis. The shortest axis of an oblate spheroid is a principal axis; and it is found by observation that all of the planets of the solar system, which are oblate spheroids, CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 207 revolve about their shorter axes, whatever may be the incli- nation of these axes to the planes of their orbits. Were the earth, by the action of any extraneous force, constrained to revolve about some other axis than that about which it is found to revolve, it would, as soon as the force ceased to act, return to its present axis of rotation. Experimental Illustrations. 139. The principles relating to the centrifugal force admit of experimental illustration. The instrument repre- sented in the figure, may be employed to show the value of the centrifugal force. A repre- sents a vertical axle upon which bWtt t^ "°i is mounted a wheel E, commu- \ ' \ *\ \ nicatincr with a train of wheel- jjT7 • re- work, by means of which the G I g axle may be made to revolve , j with any angular velocity. At F m the upper end of the axle is a forked branch BC, sustaining a stretched wire. D and E are two balls which are pierced by the wire, and are free to move along it. Between B and E is a spiral spring, whose axis coincides with the wire. Immediately below the spring, on the horizontal part of the fork, is a scale for determining the distance of the ball E, from the axis, and for measuring the degree of compres- sion of the spring. Before using the instrument, the force required to produce any degree of compression of the spring is determined experimentally, and marked on the scale. If now a motion of rotation be communicated to the axis, the ball D will at once recede to (7, but the ball E will be restrained by the spiral spring. As the velocity of rotation is increased, the spring will be compressed more and more, and the ball E, will approach B. By a suitable arrange- ment of the wheelwork, the angular velocity of the axis corresponding to any degree of compression may be ascer- 208 MECHANICS tained. We have thus all the data necessary to a verifier tion of the law of the centrifugal force. If a vessel of water be made to revolve about a vertical axis, the interior particles will recede from the axis on account of the centrifugal force, and will be heaped up about the sides of the vessel, imparting a concave form to the upper surface. The concavity will become greater as the angular velocity is increased. If a circular hoop of flexible metal be fastened so that one of its diameters shall coincide with the axis of a whirling machine, its lower point being fastened to the horizontal beam, and a motion of rotation be imparted, the portions of the hoop farthest from the axis will be most affected by the centrifugal force, and the hoop will be observed to assume an elliptical form. If a sponge, filled with water, be attached to one of the arms of a whirling machine, and a motion of rotation be imparted, the water will be thrown from the sponge. This principle has been made use of in a machine for drying clothes. An annular trough of copper is mounted upon an axis by means of radial arms, the axis being connected with a train of wheelwork, by means of which it may be put in motion. The outer wall is pierced with holes for the escape of the water, and a lid serves to confine the articles to be dried. To use this instrument, the linen, after being washed, is placed in the annular space, and a rapid motion of rotation imparted to the machine. The linen is thrown, by the centrifugal force, against the outer wall of the instru- ment, and the water, being partially squeezed out, and par- tially thrown off by the centrifugal force, escapes through the holes made for the purpose. Sometimes as many as 1,500 revolutions per minute are given to the drying machine, in which case, the drying process is very rapid and very perfect. If a body be whirled about an axis with sufficient velo- city, it may happen that the centrifugal force generated will be greater than the force of cohesion which binds the CURVILINEAR ANT) ROTARY MOTION. 209 particles together, in which case, the body will be torn asunder. It is a common occurrence that large grindstones, when put into a state of rapid rotation, burst, the fragments being thrown with great velocity away from the axis, and often producing much destruction. When a wagon, or carriage, is driven rapidly around a corner, or is forced to turn about a circular track, the cen- trifugal force generated is often sufficient to throw out the loose articles from the vehicle, and even to overthrow the vehicle itself. When a car upon a railroad track is forced to turn around a sharp curve, the centrifugal force generated, tends to throw the weight of the cars against the rail, pro- ducing a great amount of friction, and contributing to wear out both the track and the car. To obviate this difficulty in a measure, it is customary to raise the outer rail, so that the resultant of the centrifugal force, and the force of grav- ity, shall be sensibly perpendicular to the plane of the two rails. Elevation of the outer rail of a curved track. 140. To find the inclination of the track, that is, the elevation of the outer rail, so that the resultant of the weight and centrifugal force may be perpendicular to the ^r line joining the two rails. Let x~"^X G be the centre of gravity j \ of the car, and let the figure 1 \ represent a vertical section m f[ ~^\\V\ through the centre of gravity l|r^HJ \| and the centre of the curved ILi--- — * — - track. Let GA 9 parallel to E Fi. Denoting the velocity of A, by v, we have, from Equation (55), 2, we have the acceleration due to the centrifugal force equal to — ; but, by the condi- 214: MECHANICS. tions of the problem, this is equal to the acceleration due to the weight of the body. Hence, % = g = 321, .-. v = 12.7 ft. Am. 5 4. In how many seconds must the earth revolve on its axis in order that the centrifugal force at the equator may exactly counterbalance the force of gravity, the radius of the equator being taken equal to 3962.8 miles ? SOLUTION. Reducing the miles to feet, and denoting the required velocity, by v, we have, 20923584 = 321 ... v _ y^i x 20923584. But the time of revolution is equal to the circumference of the equator, divided by the velocity. Denoting the time by t, we have, _ 2f X 20923584 v and, substituting the value of v, taken from the preceding equation, we have, after reduction, 2*V20923584 2tf X 4574 ^ nn t = — — — = — = 5068 sees. A?is. 5.67 But the earth actually revolves in 86400 sideral, or in about 86164 mean solar seconds. Hence, the earth would have to revolve 1 7 times as fast as at present, in order that the centrifugal force at the equator might be equal to the force of gravity. 5. A body is placed on a horizontal plane, which is made to revolve about a vertical axis, with an angular CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 215 velocity of 2 feet. How fur must the body be situated from the axis that it may be on the point of sliding outwards, the coefficient of friction between the body and plane being equal to .6 ? SOLUTION. Denote the required distance by r ; then will the velocity of the body be equal to 2r, and the acceleration due to the centrifugal force will be equal to 4r. But the acceleration due to the force of friction is equal to 0.6 x g — 19.3 ft. From the conditions of the problem, these two are equal, hence, 4r = 19.3 ft., .'. r = 4.825 ft. Ans. 6. What must be the elevation of the outer rail of a rail- road track, the radius of curvature being 3960 ft., the distance between the rails 5 feet, and the velocity of the car 30 miles per hour, in order that the centrifugal force may be exactly counterbalanced by the component of the weight parallel to the line joining the rails ? Ans. 0.076 ft., or 0.9 in., nearly. 7. The distance between the rails is 5 feet, the radius of the curve 600 feet, and the height of the centre of gravity of the car 5 feet. What velocity must be given to the car that it may be on the point of being overturned by the cen- trifugal force, the rails being on the same level ? We have, /o x 321 x 600 -^ .-. , A v — \/ - — = 98 ft., or 66| m., per hour. Ans. V 2x5 Work. 143. By the term work, in mechanics, is meant the effect produced by a force in overcoming a resistance, such as weight, inertia, &c. The idea of work implies that a force is continually exerted, and that the point at which it is applied moves through a certain space. Thus, when a weight is raised through a vertical height, the p^wer which 216 MECHANICS. overcomes the resistance offered by the weight is said to work, and the amount of work performed evidently depends, first, upon the weight raised, and, secondly, upon the height through which it is raised. All kinds of work may be assimilated to the raising of a weight. Hence it is, that this kind of work is assumed as a standard to which all other kinds of work are referred. The unit of work most generally adopted in this country, is the effort required to raise one pound through a height of one foot. The number of units of work required to raise any weight to any height will, therefore, be equal to the product obtained by multiplying the number of pounds in the weight by the number of feet in the height. If we take the weight of the body as it would be at the equator, for the sake of uniformity in notation, we may regard the weight and the mass as identical (Art. 11). If we denote the quantity of work expended in raising a body, by Q, the mass of the body, by m, and the height, by h, we shall have, Q — mh. When very large quantities of work are to be estimated, as in the case of steam-engines and other powerful ma- chines, a different unit is sometimes employed, called a horse power. When this unit is employed, time enters as an element. A horse power is a power which is capable of raising 33,000 lbs. through a height of one foot in one minute ; that is, it is a power capable of performing 33,000 units of work in a minute of time, or 550 units of work in one second. When an engine, then, is spoken of as being of 100 horse power, it is to be understood that it is capable of performing 55,000 units of work in a second. In general, if a force acts to overcome a resistance of m pounds, through a distance of n feet, whatever may be the cause of the resistance, or whatever may be the direction of the motion, the quantity of work will be measured by a unit of work taken mn times. CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 217 If the pressure exerted by the force is variable, we may conceive the path described by the point of application to be divided into equal parts, so small that, for each part, the pressure may be regarded as constant. If we denote the length of one of these equal parts, by p, and the force exerted whilst describing this path, by P, we shall have for the corresponding quantity of work, Pp, and for the entire quantity of work denoted by Q, we shall have the sum of these elementary quantities of work ; or, since p is the same for each, Q=p2(P) (134.) The quotient obtained by dividing the entire quantity of work by the entire path, is called the mean pressure, or the mean resistance, and is evidently the force which, acting uniformly through the same path, would accomplish the same work. Work, when the power acts obliquely to the path. 144. Let PD represent the force, and AB the path which the body D is constrained to follow. Denote the angle PDs by a, and suppose Pto be resolved into two components, one perpendicular, and ^ s D B the other parallel to AB. We shall have, for the former, 7 J sina, and, for the latter, Pcosa. The former can produce no work, since, from the nature of the case, the point cannot move in the direction of the normal ; hence, the latter is the only component which works. Let sD be the space through which the bodv is moved in any time whatever. If we denote the pressure exerted in the direction of PD, by P, and the quantity of work, by Q, we shall have, Q — Pcosa x s&. Let fall the perpendicular ss' from 8, on the direction of the 10 218 MECHANICS. force P. From the right-angled triangle Dss\ we shall have, sD x cosa = s'D. Substituting this in the preceding equation, Ave get, Q = P x s'D. That is, the quantity of work of a force acting obliquely to the path along which the point of application is con- strained to move, is equal to the intensity of the force mul- tiplied by the projection of the path upon the direction of the force. We have supposed the intensity of the force P, to be expressed in pounds, or units of mass. If we take the distance sD, infinitely small, s'D will be the virtual velocity of Z>, and the expression for the quantity of work of P will be its virtual moment (Art. 38). Hence we say that the elementary quantity of work of a force is equal to its virtual moment, and, from the principle of virtual moments, we conclude that the algebraic sum of the elementary quantities of work of any number of forces applied at the same point, is equal to the elementary quantity of work of their resultant. What is true for the elementary quantities of work at any instant, must be equally true at any other instant. Hence, the algebraic sum of all the ele- mentary quantities of work of the components in any time whatever, is equal to the algebraic sum of the elementary quantities of work of their resultant for the same time ; that is, the work of the components for any time, is equal to the work of their resultant for the same time. This principle would hardly seem to require demonstration, for, from the very definition of a resultant, it would seem to be true of necessity. If the forces are in equilibrium, the entire quantity of work will be equal to 0. This principle finds an important application, in computing tin- quantity of work required to raise the material for a wall or building ; for raising the material from a shaft ; for raising water from one reservoir to another ; and a great CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 219 variety of similar operations. In this connection, the prin- ciple may be enunciated as follows : The algebraic sum of the quantities of work required to raise the parts of a system through any vertical spaces, is equal to the quantity of work required to move the whole system over a vertical space equal to that described by the centre of gravity of the system. It also follows, from the same principle,- that, if all the pieces of a machine which moves without friction be in equilibrium in all positions, under the action of zce/ghts suspended from different parts of the machine, the centre of gravity of the system will neither ascend nor descend whilst the machine is in motion. Work, when a body is constrained to move upon a curve. 145. Let AB represent the curve, and suppose that the force is so taken that its line of direction shall always pass through a point P. Divide the curve into elements so small that each may be a 2 taken as a straight line, and, with P as a / . centre, and the distances from P to the points A/ of division as radii, describe arcs of circles. Then, denoting the force supposed constant, by p P, we shall have (from Art. 144) the ele- Fig. 127. mentary quantity of work performed whilst the point is moving over aa', equal to P x ac, or P x bb'. In like manner, the quantity of work performed whilst the point is describing a' a" will be equal to P x b'b" , and so on. Hence, by summation, we shall find the entire quantity of work performed in moving the body from B to A will be equal to P x BB'. If now we suppose the curve AB to lie in a vertical plane, and the force to be the force of gravity, the point P may be regarded as infinitely distant, the lines Pa, Pa' ''*-'£ *" perpendicular to the axis, inter- // ',<>-"'" sects it. Let A and C be any j fez-'' two points whatever, on the line FR128. of direction of P. Suppose the force P to turn the system through an infinitely small angle, and let B and D be the new positions of A and C. Draw OE, Pa, and Dc respectively perpendicular to PE\ draw also, A 0, B 0, CO, and Z>6>. Denote the distances OA, by r, 00, by r', OE, by p, and the path described by 224 MECHANICS. a point at a unit's distance from 0, by 6'. Since the angles A OB, and COD are equal, from the nature of the motion of rota- r> b E ** C 'IP tion, Ave shall have, AB = rJ', < -ff — -'^a. * and CD = r'tJ' ; and since the // s'l'-''' angular motion is infinitely small, i />--''' these lines may be regarded as ^ J o Fig. 128. straight lines, perpendicular re- spectively to OA and C From the right-angled triangles ABa and CDc, we have, .4a = rb'co&BAcLi and (7c = r'ycosDCc. In the right-angled triangles ABa, and OAE, we have ^rl^> perpendicular to 0.4, and Aa perpendicular to 0E\ hence, the angles BAa, and A OE, are equal, as are also their cosines ; hence, we have, cosBAa = cos A OE = £. r In like manner, it may be shown, that cosDCc = cosCOE= £• r Substituting in the equations just deduced, we have, Aa = p$, and Cc = p& ; .-. Aa — Cc ; whence, P . Aa = P . Cc = Dp 6'. The iirst member of the equation is this quantity of work of P, when its point of application is at A ; the second is the quantity of work of P, when its point of application is at C. Hence, we conclude, that the elementary quantity of work of ei force applied to p/rocluce rotation, is always the CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 225 same, wherever its point of application may be taken, pro- vided its line of direction remains unchanged. We conclude, also, that the elementary quantity of work is equal to the intensity of the force multiplied by its lever arm into the elementary space described by a point at a unit's distance from the axis. it' we suppose the force to act for a unit of time, the intensity and lever arm remaining the same, and denote the angular velocity, by t), we shall have, Q' = Pp&- For any number of forces similarly applied, we shall have, Q = 2(Pp)6 . . . . ( 135.) If the forces are in equilibrium, we shall have (Art. 49), 2(P/j>) = 0; consequently, Q = 0. Hence, if any number of forces tending to produce rota- tion about a fixed axis, are in equilibrium, the entire quan- tity of work of the system of forces will be equal to 0. Accumulation of Work. 148. When a body is put in motion by the action of a force, its inertia has to be overcome, and, in order to bring the body back again to a state of rest, a quantity of work has to be given out just equal to that required to put it in motion. This results from the nature of inertia. A body in motion may, therefore, be regarded as the representation of a quantity of work which can be reproduced upon any resistance opposed to its motion. Whilst one body is in motion, the work is said to be accumulated. In any given instance, the accumulated icork depends, first, upon the mass in motion ; and, secondly, up^r the velocity with which it moves. Take the case of a body y jjected vertically upwards in vacuum. The projecting force expends upon the body a quantity of work sufficient to raise it through a height equal 10* L'26 MECHANIC8. to that due to the velocity of projection. Denoting the weight of the body, by w, the height to which it rises, by A, md the accumulated work, by §, we shall have, Q =. wh. i> 2 But, h — J — , (Art. 116), hence, if Denoting the mass of the body by m, we shall have, 10 m — — (Art. 11), and, by substitution, we have, finally, y Q = \mtf ( 136.) If the body descends by its own weight, it will have impressed upon it by the force of gravity, during the descent, exactly the same quantity of work as it gave out in ascending. The amount of work accumulated in a body is evidently the same, whatever may have been the circumstances under which the velocity has been acquired ; and also, the amount of work which it is capable of giving out in overcoming any resistance is the same, whatever may be the nature of that resistance. Hence, the measure of the accumulated work of a moving mass is one-half of the mass into the square of the velocity. The expression mv', is called the living force of the body. Hence, the living force of a body is equal to its mass, multiplied by the square of its velocity. The living force of a body is the measure of twice the quantity of work expended in producing the velocity, or, it is the measure of twice the quantity of work which the body is capable <>t' giving out. When the forces exerted tend to increase the velocity, CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 227 their work is regarded as positive ; when they tend to dimin- ish it, their work is regarded as negative. It is the aggre- gate of all the work expended, both positive and negative, that is measured by the quantity, i/ny 2 . I±^ at any instant, a body whose mass is m, has a velocity v, and, at any subsequent instant, its velocity has become v\ we shall have, for the accumulated work at these two instants, Q = iray 2 , Q' = ±mv'* ; and, for the aggregate quantity of work expended in the interval, Q" = ±m(v'* - v") . . . . (13V.) When the motive forces, during the interval, perform a greater quantity of work than the resistances, the value of v' will be greater than that of v, and there will be an accu- mulation of work in the interval. When the work of the resistances exceeds that of the motive forces, the value of v will exceed that of v\ Q" will be negative, and there will be a loss of living force, which is absorbed by the resistances. Living Force of Revolving Bodies. 149. Denote the angular velocity of a body which is restrained by an axis, by d ; denote the masses of its ele- mentary particles by m, m\ &c, and their distances from the axis of rotation, by r, r', &c. Their velocities will be ?\\ r'A, ifcc, and their living forces will be mr'd 5 , mV' J f) J , &c. Denoting the entire living force of the body, by X, Ave shall have, by summation, and recollecting that $* is the same for all the terms, L = 2(mry .... (138.) But 2(mr 2 ) is the expression for the moment of inertia of the body, taken with respect to the axis of rotation. De- 22S MECHANICS. noting the entire mass by Jff, its radius of gyration, with respect to the axis of rotation, by k, we shall have, L = MW. If, at any subsequent instant, the angular velocity aas become d\ we shall, at that instant, have, L' = MM" ; and, for the loss or gain of living force in the interval, we shall have, L" = MJP(6'* — 6*). . . (139.) If we make &'* — ^ = 1, we shall have, L"' = Mk> - 2(mr 2 ) . . (140.) which shows that the moment of inertia of a body, with respect to an axis, is equal to the living force lost oi gained whilst the body is experiencing a change in the square of its angular velocity equal to 1. The principle of living forces is extensively applied in discussing the circumstances of motion of machines. When the motive power performs a quantity of work greater than that necessary to overcome the resistances, the velocities of the parts become accelerated, a quantity of work is stored up, to be again given out when the resistances offered require a greater quantity of work to overcome them than is furnished by the motor. In many machines, pieces are expressly introduced to equalize the motion, and this is particularly the case when either the motive power or the resistance to be overcome, is, in its nature, variable. Such pieces are called fly-wheels. Fly-Wheels. 150. A fly-wheel is a heavy wheel, usually of iron, mounted upon an axis } near the point of application of the CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 229 force which it is destined to regulate. It is generally com- posed of a heavy rim, connected with the axis by means of radial arms. Sometimes it consists of radiating bars, carrying heavy spheres of metal at their outer extremity. In either case, we see, from Equation 139, that, for a given quantity of work absorbed, the value of d'- — o a will be less as M and k are greater ; that is, the change FisTi$» of angular velocity will be less, as the mass of the fly-wheel and its radius of gyration increase. It is for this reason that the peculiar form of fly-wheel indicated above, is adopted, it being the form that most nearly realizes the conditions pointed out. The principal objection to large fly-wheels in machinery, is the great amount of hurtful resistance which they create, such as fric- tion on the axle, etc. Thus, a fly-wheel of 42000 lbs. would create a force of friction of 4200 lbs., the coefficient of fric- tion being but T \> ; and, if the diameter of the axle were 8 inches, and the number of revolutions 30 per minute, this resistance alone would be equal to 8 horse powers. EXAMPLES. 1. The weight of the ram of a pile-driver is 400 lbs., and it strikes the head of a pile with a velocity of 20 feet. What is the amount of work stored up in it ? SOLUTION. The height due to the velocity, 20 feet, is equal to —2. - 6.22 ft., nearly. Hence, the stored up work is equal to 400 lbs. X 6.22 ft. = 2488 lbs. ft. ; 230 MECHANICS. or, the stored up work, equal to half the living force, is equal to 400 (20) a — - x - — — = 2488 units. Ans. 32i 2 2. A train, weighing GO tons, has a velocity of 40 miles per hour when the steam is shut off. How far will it travel, if -no brake be applied, before the velocity is reduced to 10 miles per hour, the resistance to motion being estimated at 10 lbs. per ton. Ans. '1 1236 ft. Composition of Rotations. 151. Let a body A CBD, that is free to move, be acted upon by a force which, of itself, would cause the body to revolve for the infinitely small time dt y about the line AP, with an angu- lar velocity v ; and at the same instant, let the body be acted upon by a second force, which would of itself cause the body to revolve about CD, for the time dt, with an angular velocity v'. Suppose the axes to intersect each other at O, and let P be any point in the plane of the axes. Draw PF and PG res- pectively perpendicular to OP and OC\ denoting the for- mer, by x, and the latter, by y. Then will the velocity of P due to the first force, be equal to vx, and its velocity due to the second force will be equal to v'y. Suppose the rota- tion to take place in such a manner, that the tendency of the rotation about one of the axes, shall be to depress the point below the plane, whilst that about the other is to elevate it above the plane ; then will the effective velocity of P be equal to vx — v'y. If this effective velocity is 0, the. j)oi?it P icill remain at rest. Placing the expression ju*t deduced equal to 0, and transposing, we have, vx — v'y. CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 231 To determine the position of P, lay off Off equal to », 01 equal to v', and regard these lines as the representatives of two forces ; we have, from the equation, the moment of v, with respect to the point P, equal to the moment of v\ with respect to the same point. Hence, the point P must be somewhere upon the diagonal Off, of the parallelogram described on w, and v' . But P may be anywhere on this line ; hence, every point of the diagonal OK, remains at rest during the time dt, and is, consequently, the resultant axis of rotation. We have, therefore, the following principles : If a body be acted upon simultaneously by two forces, each tending to impart a motion of rotation about a sepa- rate axis, the resultant motion tcill be one of rotation about a third axis lying in the plane of 'the other tico, and passing through their common point of intersection. The direction of the resultant axis coincides with the diagonal of a parallelogram, \ohose adjacent sides are the component axes, and ichose lengths are proportional to the impressed angidar velocities. Let OH and 01 represent, as before, the angular veloci- ties v and v', and Off the diagonal of the parallelogram constructed on these lines I "K as sides. Take any point I, on the second /i^i^s axis, and let fall a perpendicular on Off and. J^\ / Off; denote the former by r, and the H latter, by r" ; denote, also, the resultant Fig - 18L angular velocity, by v". Since the actual space passed over by I, during the time t, depends only upon the first force, it will be the same whether we regard the revolution as taking place about the axis Off, or about the axis Off. If we suppose the rotation to take place about Off, the space passed over in the time dt, will be equal to rvdt ; if we sup- pose the rotation to take place about Off, the space passed over in the same time will be equal to r"v"dt. Placing these expressions equal to each other, we have, after reduc- tion, r' 232 MECHANICS. But regarding I as a centre of moments, we shall hare, from the principle of moments, r OK x r" = vr : or, OK v. By comparing the last two equations, we have, v" = OK. That is, the resultant angular velocity will be equal to the diagonal of the parallelogram described on the component angular velocities as sides. By a course of reasoning entirely similar to that employed in demonstrating the parallelopipedon of forces, we might show, that, If a body be acted upon by three simultaneous forces, each tending to produce rotation about separate axes inter- secting each other, the resultant motion will be one of rota- tion about the diagonal of the parallelopipedon whose adja- cent edges are the component angular velocities, and the resultant angular velocity will be represented by the length of this diagonal. The principles just deduced are called, respectively, the parallelogram and the parallelopipedon of rotations. Application to the Gyroscope. 152. The gyroscope is an instrument used to illustrate the laws of rotary motion. It consists essentially of a heavy wheel A, mounted upon an axle BC This axle is attached, by means of pivots, to the inner ed<_e of a circular hoop I) 1\ within which the wheel A can t iii-n freely. On one side of the hoop, and in the prolongation of the axle BC, is a bar EF, having a conical hole drilled on its lower Fig. 132. CTTRVILIMsAR AND ROTARY MOTION. 233 face to receive the pointed summit of a vertical standard G. If a string be wrapped several times around the axle J>C, and then rapidly unwound, so as to impart a rapid motion of rotation to the wheel A, in the direction indicated by the arrow-head, it is observed that the machine, instead of sinking downwards under the action of gravity, takes up a retrograde orbital motion about the pivot 6r, as indicated by the arrow-head IT. For a time, the orbital motion in- creases, and, under certain circumstances, the bar EF is observed to rise upwards in a retrograde spiral direction; and, if the cavity for receiving the pivot is pretty shallow. the bar may even be thrown off the vertical standard. Instead of a bar EF, the instrument may simply have an ear at E, and be suspended from a point above by means of a string attached to the ear. The phenomena observed are the same as before. Before explaining these phenomena, it will be necessary to point out the conventional rules for attributing proper signs to the different rotations. Let OX, OY, and OZ, be three rectangular axes. It has been agreed to call all dis- tances, estimated from 0, to- wards either JT, Y, or Z, posi- tive / consequently, all distances estimated in a contrary direction V^l- ss^i-^--' must be regarded as negative. y c If a body revolve about either Fig. 133. axis, or about any line through the origin, in such a manner as to appear to an eye beyond it, in the axis and looking towards the origin, to move in the same direction as the hands of a watch, that rotation is considered positive. If rotation takes place in an opposite direction, it is negative. The arrow-head A, indicates the direction of positive rotation about the axis of Jl. To an eye situated beyond the body, as at JT, and looking towards the origin, the motion appears to be in the same direction as the motion of the hands of a watch. The arrowhead B< 3 P.'M 11' 234 MECHANICS. indicates the direction of positive rotation about the axis of F, and the arrow-head C, the direction of positive rota- tion about the axis of Z. Suppose the axis of the wheel of the gyroscope to coincide with the axis of A", taken horizontal; let the standard be taken to coincide with the axis of Z, the axis of Y bein^ perpendicular to them both. Let a positive rotation be communicated to the wheel by means of a string. For a very short time dt, the angular velocity may be regarded as constant. In the same time dt, the force of gravity acts to impart a motion of positive rotation to the whole instru- ment about the axis of Y, which may, for an instant, be regarded as constant. Denote the former angular velocity by tf, and the latter by v'. Lay off in a positive direction on the axis of A, the distance OD equal to v, and, on the positive direction of the axis of Y, the distance OP equal to v', and complete the parallelogram OF. Then (Art. 151) will OF represent the direction of the resultant axis of revo- lution, and the distance OF will represent the resultant angular velocity, which denote by v". In moving from OB to OF, the axis takes up a positive, or retrograde orbital motion about the axis of Z. To construct the position of the resultant axis for the second instant dt, we must com- pound three angular velocities. Lay off on a perpendicular to OF and OZ, the angular velocity OG due to the action of gravity during the time dt, and on OZ the angular velo- city in the orbit ; construct a parallelopipedon on these lines, and draw its diagonal through O. This diagonal will coincide in direction with the resultant axis for the second instant, and its length will represent the resultant angular velocity (Art. 151). For the next instant, we may proceed as before, and so on continually. Since, in each case, the diagonal is greater than either edge of the paral- lelopipedon, it follows that the angular velocity will contin- ually increase, and, were there no hurtful resistances, this increase would go on indefinitely. The effect of gravity is continually exerted to depress the centre of gravity of the CURVILINEAR AND ROTARY MOTION". 235 instrument, whilst the effect of the orbital rotation is to elevate it. When the latter effect prevails, the axis of the gyroscope will continually rise ; when the former prevails, the gyroscope will continually descend. Whether the one or the other of these conditions will be fulfilled, depends upon the angular velocity of the wheel of the gyroscope, and upon the position of the centre of gravity of the instru- ment. Were the instrument counterpoised so that the centre of gravity would lie exactly over the pivot, there would be no orbital motion, neither would the instrument rise or fall. Were the centre of gravity thrown on the opposite side of the pivot from the wheel, the rotation due to gravity would be negative, that is, the orbital motion would be direct, instead of retrograde. 236 MECHANICS CHAPTER VII. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. Classification of Fluids. 153. A fluid is a body whose particles move freely amongst each other, each particle yielding to the slightest force. Fluids are of two classes : liquids, of which water is a type, and gases, or vapors, of which air and steam are types. The distinctive property of the first class is, that they are sensibly incompressible; thus, water, on being pressed by a force of 15 lbs. on each square inch of surface, only suffers a diminution of about yooVo o °f ^ ts Du lk. The second class comprises those which are readily compressible ; thus, air and steam are easily compressed into smaller vol- umes, and when the pressure is removed, they expand, so as to occupy larger volumes. Most liquids are imperfect ; that is, there is more or less adherence between their particles, giving rise to viscosity. In what follows, they will be regarded as destitute of vis- cosity, and homogeneous. For certain purposes, fluids may also be regarded as destitute of weight, without impairing the validity of the conclusions. Principle of Equal Pressures. 154. From the nature and constitution of a fluid, it fol- lows, that each of its particles is perfectly movable in all directions. From this fact, we deduce the following funda- mental law, viz. : If a fluid is in equilibrium under the action of any forces whatever, each particle of the mass is equally pressed in all directions / for, if any particle were more strongly pressed in one direction than in the others, MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 237 it would yield in that direction, and motion it ould ensue, which is contrary to the hypothesis. This is called the principle of equal pressures. It follows, from the principle of equal pressures, that if any point of a fluid in equilibrium, be pressed by any force, that pressure will be transmitted without change of intensity to every other point of the fluid mass. This may be illustrated experimentally, as follows: Let AB represent a vessel filled with a fluid in equili- brium. Let C and D represent two openings, furnished with tightly-fit- ting pistons. Suppose that forces are applied to the pistons just sufficient to maintain the fluid mass in equilibrium. If, now, any additional force be appli- ed to the piston P, the piston Q will be forced outwards ; and in order to prevent this, and restore the equili- brium, it will be found necessary to apply a force to the piston g, which shall have the same ratio to the force ap- plied at P that the area of the piston Q has to the area of the piston P. This principle will be found to hold true, whatever may be the sizes of the two pistons, or in what- ever portions of the surface they may be inserted. If the area of P be taken as a unit, then will the pressure upon Q be equal to the pressure on P, multiplied by the area of Q. The pressure transmitted through a fluid in equilibrium, to the surface of the containing vessel, is normal to that sur- face ; for if it were not, we might resolve it into two compo- nents, one normal to the surface, and the other tangential ; the effect of the former would be destroyed by the resistance of the vessel, whilst the latter would impart motion to the fluid, which is contrary to the supposition of equilibrium. In like manner, it may be shown, that the resultant of al 1 the pressures, acting at any point of the free surface of a fluid, is normal to the surface at that point. When the only force acting is the force of gravity, the surface is level. For 238 MECHANICS. small areas, a level surface coincides sensibly with a horizon- tal plane. For larger areas, as lakes and oceans, a level sur- face coincides with the general surface of the earth. Were the earth at rest, the level surface of lakes and oceans would be spherical ; but, on account of the centrifugal force aris- ing from the rotation of the earth, it is sensibly an ellip- soidal surface, whose axis of revolution is the axis of the earth. Pressure due to Weight. 155. If an incompressible fluid be in a state of equili- brium, the pressure at any point of the mass arising from the weight of the fluid, is proportional to the depth of the point below the free surface. Take an infinitely small surface, supposed horizontal, and conceive it to be the base of a vertical prism whose altitude is equal to its distance below the free surface. Conceive this filament to be divided by horizontal planes into infi- nitely small, or elementary prisms. It is evident, from the principle of equal })ressures, that the pressure upon the lower face of any one of these elementary prisms is greater than that upon its upper face, by the weight of the element, whilst the lateral pressures are such as to counteract each other's effects. The pressure upon the lower face of the first prism, counting from the top, is, then, just equal to its weight ; that upon the lower face of the second is equal to the weight of the first, ]?lus the weight of the second, and so on to the bottom. Hence, the pressure upon the assumed surface is equal to the weight of the entire column of fluid above it. Had the assumed elementary surface been oblique to the horizon, or perpendicular to it, and at the same depth as before, the pressure upon it would have been the same, from the principle of equal pressures. We have, therefore, the following law : TJie pressure i/pon any elementary portion of the surface of a vessel containing a heavy fluid is equal to the weight of a prism of the fluid whose base is equal to that surface, MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 239 and whose altitude is equal to its depth below the free surface. Denoting the area of the elementary surface, by 5, its depth below the free surface, by z, the weight of a unit of the volume of the fluid, by w, and the pressure, by p, we shall have, p = wzs ( 141.) We have seen that the pressure upon any element of a surface is normal to the surface. Denote the angle which this normal makes with the vertical, estimated from above, down- wards, by rojection of the element, and whose altitude is equal to the distance of the element from the upper surface of the fluid. The distance z has been estimated as positive from the surface of the fluid downwards. If 9 < 90°, Ave have cos? positive ; hence, p' will be positive, which shows that the vertical pressure is exerted downwards. If

90°, we have cosp negative ; hence, p' is negative, which shows that the vertical pressure is exerted upwards (see Fig. 135). Suppose the interior surface of a vessel containing a heavy fluid to be divided into elementary portions, whose areas are denoted by s, s\ s", &c. ; denote the distances of these 24:0 MECHANICS. elements below the upper Surface, by z, z', z", &c. From the principle just demonstrated, the pressures upon these surfaces will be denoted by icsz, ws'z, ics"z", &c, and the entire pressure upon the interior of the vessel will be equal to, w(sz + s'z + s"z" + &c.) ; or, to x 2(sz). Let Z denote the depth of a column of the fluid, whose base is equal to the entire surface pressed, and whose weight is equal to the entire pressure, then will this pressure be equal to w(s + s' -+- *" + &c)Z; or, wZ . Is. Equating these values, we have, w.2(sz) =wZ.l(s), .'. Z=^j • (1^3.) The second member of (143), (Art. 51), expresses the distance of the centre of gravity of the surface pressed, below the free surface of the fluid. Hence, The entire pressure of a heavy fluid upon the interior of the containing vessel, is equal to the weight of a volume of the fluid, u'/wse base is equal to the area of the surface ■pressed, and ichose altitude is equal to the distance of the centre of gravity of the surface from the free surface of the fluid. EXAMPLES. 1. A hollow sphere is filled with a liquid. How does the entire pressure, on the interior surface, compare with the weight of the liquid ? SOLUTION. Denote the radius of the interior surface of the sphere, by r, and the weight of a unit of volume of the liquid, by w. The entire surface pressed is measured by 4c?- 2 ; and, since the centre of gravity of the surface pressed is at a distance r below the surface of the liquid, the entire pre* MKCHAXK.S OF LIQUIDS. 241 sure on tne interior surface will be measured by the expression, w X 4^r 5 x r — 4«tor*. But the weight of the liquid is equal to Hence, the entire pressure is equal to three times the weight of the liquid. 2. A hollow cylinder, with a circular base, is filled with a liquid. How does the pressure on the interior surface com- pare with the weight of the liquid? SOLUTION. Denote the radius of the base of the cylinder, by r, and the altitude, by h. The centre of gravity of the lateral surface is at a distance below the upper surface of the fluid equal to \h. If we denote the weight of the unit of volume of the liquid, by w, we shall have, for the entire pressure on the interior surface, whxr* + 2wxr . \h* = wirrh{r -f- h). But the weight of the liquid is equal to wtr^h. T + h Hence, the total pressure is equal to times the iceight of the liquid. If we suppose h = r, the pressure will be twice the weight. If we suppose r = 2h, we shall have the pressure equal to \ of the weight. If we suppose h =; 2r, the pressure will be equal to three times the weight, and so on. 11 242 MECHANICS. In all cases, the total pressure will exceed tbe weight of the liquid. 3. A right coue, with a circular base, stands on its base, and is tilled with a liquid. How does the pressure on the internal surface compare with the weight of the liquid ? solution. Denote the radius of the base, by r, and the altitude, by A, then will the slant height be equal to ^/hF^?. The centre of gravity of the lateral surface, below the upper surface of the liquid is equal to §A. If we denote the weight of a unit of volume of the liquid, by w, we shall have, for the total pressure on the interior surface, wvr'h + %w*rhi/h* + r* = w«rh{r + f -/A 2 + r 3 ). But the weight of the liquid is equal to %ioirr*h = w*rh x £r. 3r + 2v / A r T~r a Hence, the total pressure is equal to times the iceight. 4. Required the relation between the pressure and the weight in the preceding case, when the cone stands on its vertex. SOLUTION. The total pressure is equal to ^wrrhyh 2 4- r° ; ■\Zh a -f r* and, consequently, the pressure is equal to — times the weight of the liquid MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 243 5. What is the pressure on the lateral faces of a cubical vessel filled with water, the edges of the cube being 4 feet, and the weight of the water 62^ lbs. per cubic foot ? A?is. 8000 lbs. 6. A cylindrical vessel is filled with water. The height of the vessel is 4 feet, and the radius of the base 6 feet. What is the pressure on the lateral surface ? Ans. 18850 lbs., nearly. Centre of Pressure on a Plane Surface. 156. Let ABCD represent a plane, pressed by a fluid on its upper surface, AB its intersec- tion with the free surface of the fluid, , j± G its centre of gravity, the centre y- ^^^^^ of pressure, and s the area of any cept the scale-pans have hooks at- tached to their lower surfaces for the purpose of suspending bodies. The suspension is effected by a fine platinum wire, or by some — other material not acted upon by the liquids employed. n Fig. 144 To determine the Specific Gravity of an Insoluble Body. 161. Attach the suspending wire to the first scale-pan, and after allowing it to sink in a vessel of water to a certain depth, counterpoise it by an equal weight, attached to the hook of the second scale-pan. Place the body in the first scale-pan, and counterpoise it by weights in the second pan. These weights will give the weight of the body in air. Xext, attach the body to the suspending wire, and immerse it in the water. The buoyant effort of the Mater will be equal to the weight of a volume of water equivalent to that of the body (Art. 157) ; hence, the second pan will descend. Restore the equilibrium by- weights placed iti the first pan. These weights will give the weight of the displaced water. 254 MECHANICS. Divide the weight of the body in air by the weight just found, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. If the body will not sink in water, determine its weight in air as before ; then attach to it a body so heavy, that the combination will sink ; find, as before, the loss of weight of the combination, and also the loss of weight of the heavier body ; take the latter from the former, and the difference will be the loss of weight of the lighter body ; divide its weight in air by this weight, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. If great accuracy is required, account must be taken of the buoyant effort of the air, which, when the body is very light, and of considerable dimensions, will render the appa- rent weight less than the true weight, or the weight in vacuum. Since the weights used in counterpoising are always very dense, and of small dimensions, the buoyant effort of the air upon them may always be neglected. To^determine the true weight of a body in vacuum : let to denote its weight in air, w' its weight in water, and IF its weight in vacuum ; then will W — ?c, and IV — w', denote its loss of weight in air and water ; denote the specific gravity of air referred to water, by s. Since the losses of weight in air and water arc proportional to their specific gravities, we have, W — w : W — w' : : s : 1 ; or, W — to = * W — sio\ 1 — s This weight should be used, instead of the weight in air. To determine the Specific Gravity of Liquids. 16*2. First Method. — Take a vial with a narrow neck, and weigh it ; fill it with the liquid, and weigh again ; empty out the liquid, and fill with water, and weigh again ; deduct from the last two weights, respectively, the weight of the vial; these results will give the weights of- equal MECHANICS OF LIQUID?. 255 volumes of the liquid and of water. Divide the former by the latter, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. Second Method. — Take a heavy body, that will sink both in the liquid and in water, and which will not be acted upon by either ; determine its loss of weight, as already explained, first in the liquid, then in water; divide the former by the latter, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. The reason is evident. Third Method. — Let AB and CD represent two graduated glass tubes of half an inch in diameter, open at both ends. Let their upper ends communicate with the receiver of an air-pump, and their lower ends dip into two cisterns, one containing distilled water, and the other the liquid whose specific gravity is to be determined. Let the air be partially exhausted from the receiver by means of an air-pump ; the liquids will rise in the tubes, but to different heights, these being inversely as the specific gravities of the liquids. If we divide theheigl t of the column of water by that of the other liquid, the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. By creating different degrees of rarefaction, the columns will rise to different heights, but their ratios ought to be the same. We are thus enabled to make a series of observations, each cor- responding to a different degree of rarefaction, from which a more accurate result can be had than from a single obser- vation. To determine the Specific Gravity of a Soluble Body. 163. Find its specific gravity by the method already given, with respect to some liquid in which it is not soluble, and find also the specific gravity of this liquid referred to water; take the product of these specific gravities, and it will be the specific gravity sought. For, if the body is m times heavier than an equivalent volume of the liquid used, 256 MECHANICS. and this is n times heavier than an equivalent volume of water, it follows that the body is mn times heavier than its volume of water, whence the rule. The auxiliary liquid, in some cases, might be a saturated solu- tion of the given body in water ;. the rule remains unchanged. To determine the Specific Gravity of the Air. 164. Take a hollow globe, fitted with a stop-cock, to shut off communication with the external air, and, by means of the air-pump or condensing syringe, pump in as much air as is convenient, close the stop-cock, and weigh the globe thus filled. Provide a glass tube, graduated so as to show cubic inches and decimals of a cubic inch, and, having tilled it with mer- cury, invert it over a mercury bath. Open the stopcock, and allow the com- pressed air to escape into the inverted tube, taking care to bring the tube into such a position that the mercury without the tube is at the same level as within. The reading on the tube will give the volume of the escaped air. Weigh the globe again, and subtract the weight thus found from the first weight ; this difference will indicate the weight of the escaped air. Having reduced the measured volume of air to what it would have occupied at a standard temperature and barometric pressure, by means of rules yet to be deduced, compute the weight of an equivalent volume of water; divide the weight of the corrected volume of air by that of an equivalent volume of distilled water, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. To determine the Specific Gravity of a Gas. IG5. Take a glass globe of suitable dimensions, fitted with a stop-cook for shutting off communication with the atmosphere. Fill the globe with air, and determine the weight of the globe thus filled referred to a vacuum, as already explained. From the known volume of the globe Fig. 146. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 257 and the specific gravity of air, the weight of the contained air can be computed ; subtract this from the previous weight, and we shall have the true weight of the globe alone; determine in succession the weights of the globe filled with water and with the gas in vacuum, and from each subtract the weight of the globe ; divide the latter result by the former; the quotient will be the specific gravity required. Hydrometers. 166. A hydrometer is a floating body, used for the pur- pose of determining specific gravities. Its construction de- pends upon the principle of floatation. Hydrometers are of two kinds. 1. Those in which the submerged volume is constant. 2. Those in which the weight of the instrument remains constant. Nicholson's Hydrometer. 167. This instrument consists of a hollow brass cylinder A, at the lower extremity of which is fastened a basket B, and at the upper extremity a wire, bearing a scale-pan C. At the bottom of the basket is a ball of glass E, containing mer- cury, the object of which is, to cause the in- strument to float in an upright position. By means of this ballast, the instrument is ad- justed so that a weight of 500 grains, placed in the pan C\ will sink it in distilled water to a notch 2>, filed in the neck. To determine the specific gravity of a solid Fig. 147. which weighs less than 500 grains. Place the body in the pan C, and add weights till the instrument sinks, in distilled water, to the notch J). The added weights, substracted from 500 grains, will give the weight of the body in air. Place the body in the basket JB, which generally has a reticulated cover, to prevent the body from floating away, and add other weights to the pan, until the instrument again sinks to the notch D. The weights last added give the weight of the water displaced by the body. 258 MECHANICS. Divide the first of these -weights by the second, and tne quotient will be the specific gravity required. To find the specific gravity of a liquid. Having carefully weighed the instrument, place it in the liquid, and add weights to the scale-pan till it sinks to D. The weight of the instrument, plus the sum of the weights added, will be the weight of the liquid displaced by the instrument. Next, place the instrument in distilled water, and add weights till it sinks to I). The weight of the instrument, plus the added weights, gives the weight of the displaced water. Divide the first result by the second, and the quotient will be the specific gravity required. The reason for this rule is evident. A modification of this instrument, in which the basket B, is omitted, is sometimes constructed for determining specific gravities of liquids only. This kind of hydrometer is generally made of glass, that it may not be acted upon chemically, by the liquids into which it is plunged. The hydrometer just described, is generally known as Fahren heiVs hydrometer, or Fahrenheit's areometer. Scale Areometer. 168. The scale areometer is a hydrometer whose weight remains constant ; the specific gravity of a liquid is made known by the depth to which it sinks in it. The instrument consists of a hollow glass cylinder A, n with a stem (7, of uniform diameter. At the bottom of the cylinder is a bulb B, containing mercury, to make the instrument float upright. By introducing a suitable quantity of mercury, the instrument may be adjusted so as to float at any desired point of the stem. When it is de- signed to determine the specific gravities of liquids, both heavier and lighter than water, it is bal- B o lasted so that in distilled water, it will sink to the n.. 14-. middle of the stem. This point is marked on the stem with a file, and since the specific gravity of water is 1, it is numbered 1 on the scale. A liquid is then formed by dissolving common salt in water whose specific gravity is MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 259 1.1, and the instrument is allowed to float freely in it; the point E, to which it then sinks, is marked on the stem, and the intermediate part of the scale, HE, is divided into 10 equal parts, and the graduation continued above and below throughout the stem. The scale thus constructed is marked on a piece of paper placed within the hollow stem. To use this hydrometer, we have simply to put it into the liquid and allow it to come to rest; the division of the scale which cor- responds to the surface of floatation, makes known the spe- cific gravity of the liquid. The hypothesis on which this instrument is graduated, is, that the increments of specific gravity are proportional to the increments of the submerged portion of the stem. This hypothesis is only approximately true, but it approaches more nearly to the truth as the dia- meter of the stem diminishes. When it is only desired to use the instrument for liquids heavier than water, the instrument is ballasted so that the division 1 shall come near the top of the stem. If it is to be used for liquids lighter than water, it is ballasted so that the division 1 shall fall near the bottom of the stem. In this case we determine the point 0.9 by using a mixture of alcohol and water, the principle of graduation being the same as in the first instance. Volumeter. 169. The volumeter is a modification of the scale areo- meter, differing from it only in the method of graduation. The graduation is effected as follows : The instru- ment is placed in distilled water, and allowed to come to a state of rest, and the point on the stem where the surface cuts it, is marked with a file. The submerged volume is then accurately deter- mined, and the stem is graduated in such a man- ner that each division indicates a volume equal to a hundredth part of the volume originally sub- merged. The divisions are then numbered from the first mark in both directions, as indicated in the figure. To use the instrument, place it in the * lg ' 149 ' iquid, and note the division to which it sinks ; C A B V 260 MECHANICS. divide 100 by the number indicated, and the quotient will be the specific gravity sought. The principle employed is, that the specific gravities of liquids are inversely as the vol- umes of equal weights. Suppose that the instrument indi- cates x parts ; then the weight of the instrument displaces x parts of the liquid, whilst it displaces 100 parts of water. Denoting the specific gravity of the liquid by S, and that of water by 1, we have, S: 1 ::100 : as, .-. S = — • x A table may be computed to save the necessity of per forming the division. Densimeter. 170. The densimeter is a modification of the volum- eter, and admits of use when only a small portion of the liquid can be had, as is often the case in examining animal secretions, such as bile, chyle, &c. The S construction of the densimeter differs from that of the volumeter, last described, in having a small cup at the upper extremity of the stem, destined to receive the fluid whose specific gravity is to be determined. The instrument is ballasted so that when the cup is empty, the densimeter will sink in distilled water to a point J5, near the bottom of the stem. This point is the of the instrument. The cup is then filled with distilled water, and the point C, to Fig. 150 which it sinks, is marked; the space BC, is divi- ded into any number of equal parts, say 10, and the grad- uation is continued to the top of the tube To use the instrument, place if in distilled water, and fill the cup with the liquid in question, and note the division to which it sinks. Divide 10 by the number of this division, and the quotient will be the specific gravity requ'red. The principle of the densimeter is the same as that of the volu- meter. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 261 Centesimal Alcoholometer of Gay Lussac. 171. This instrument is the same in construction as the scale areometer ; the graduation is, however, made on a diff- erent principle. Its object is, to determine the percentage <>t alcohol in a mixture of alcohol and water. The graduation is made as follows : the instrument is first placed in absolute alcohol, and ballasted so that it will sink nearly to the top of the stem. This point is marked 1 00. Next, a mixture of 95 parts of alcohol and 5 of water, is made, and the point to which the instrument sinks, is marked 95. The inter- mediate space is divided into 5 equal parts. Next, a mix- ture of 90 parts of alcohol and 10 of water is made; the point to which the instrument sinks, is marked 90, and the space between this and 95, is divided into 5 equal parts. In this manner, the entire stem is graduated by successive operations. The spaces on the scale are not equal at differ- ent points, but, for a space of five parts, they may be re- garded as equal, without sensible error. To use the instrument, place it in the mixture of alcohol and water, and read the division to which it sinks ; this will indicate the percentage of alcohol in the mixture. In all of the instruments, the temperature has to be taken into account ; this is usually effected by means of correc- tions, which are tabulated to accompany the different instruments. On the principle of the alcoholometer, are constructed a great variety of areometers, for the purpose of determining the degrees of saturation of wines, syrups, and other liquids employed in the arts. In some nicely constructed hydrometers, the mercury used as ballast serves also to fill the bulb of a delicate ther- mometer, whose stem rises into the cylinder of the instru- ment, and thus enables us to note the temperature of the fluid in which it is immersed. EXAMPLES. 1. A cubic foot of water weighs 1000 ounces. Required 262 MECHANICS. the weight of a cubical block of stone, one of whose edges is 4 feet, its specific gravity being 2.5. Ans. 10000 lbs. 2. Required the number of cubic feet in a body whose weight is 1000 lbs., its specific gravity being 1.25. Ans. 12.8. 3. Two lumps of metal weigh respectively 3 lbs., and 1 lb., and their specific gravities are 5 and 9. What will be the specific gravity of an alloy formed by melting them together, supposing no contraction of volume to take place. Ans. 5.625. 4. A body weighing 20 grains has a specific gravity of 2.5. Required its loss of weight in water. Ans. 8 grains. 5. A body weighs 25 grains in water, and 40 grains in a liquid whose specific gravity is .7. What is the weight of the body in vacuum ? Ans. 75 grains. 6. A Nicholson's hydrometer weighs 250 grains, and it requires an additional weight of 336 grains to sink it to the notch in the stem, in a mixture of alcohol and water. What is the specific gravity of the mixture? Ans. .781. 7. A block of wood is found to sink in distilled water till •£ of its volume is submerged. What is its specific gravity ? Ans. .875. 8. The weight of a piece of cork in air, is f oz. ; the weight of a piece of lead in water, is 6| oz. ; the weight of the cork and lead together in Mater, is 4 t J-q oz. What is the specific gravity of the cork ? Ans, 0.24. 9. A solid, whose weight is 250 grains, weighs in water, 147 grains, and, in another fluid, 120 grains. What is the specific gravity of the latter fluid ? Ans. 1.26°. 10. A solid weighs 60 grains in air, 40 in water, and 30 in an acid. What is the specific gravity of the acid ? Ans. 1.5. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. :63 The following table of the specific gravity of some of the most important solid and fluid bodies, is compiled from a table given in the Ordnance Manual. TABLE OF SPECIFIC GRAVITIES OF SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS. SOLIDS. SPEC. GKAV. 80LIDS. SPEC. 6EAV. Antimony, cast 6.712 8.396 8 788 19.361 7.788 7.207 11.352 13.598 13.580 22.069 20.337 10.511 7.291 6.861 1.900 2.784 1.270 3.521 1 500 2.168 1.822 Limestone Marble, common .... Salt, common Sand Slate Stone, common Tallow Boxwood 3.180 2.686 Copper, cast Gold, hammered Iron, bar Iron, cast 2.130 1.800 2.672 2.520 . 945 Mercury at 32° F " at 60° Platina, rolled " hammered. . . Silver, hammered. . . . 0.912 Cedar Cherry Lignum vitae Mahoganv . 596 0.715 1.333 <>.8o4 Tin, cast 1.170 Zinc, cast Bricks Chalk Coal, bitumiuous Diamond Earth, common Gvpsum Pine, yellow Nitric acid Sulphuric acid Alcohol, absolute... . Ether, sulphuric .... Sea water Olive oil 0.660 1.217 1.841 0.792 0.715 1.026 0.915 Ivory Oil of Turpentine . . . 0.870 Thermometer. 172. A thermometer is an instrument used for measur- ing the temperatures of bodies. It is found, by observation, that almost all bodies expand when heated, and contract when cooled, so that, other things being equal, they always occupy the same volumes at the same temperatures. It is also found that different bodies expand and contract in a different ratio for the same increments of temperature. As a general rule, liquids expand much more rapidly than solids, and gases much more rapidly than liquids. The construc- tion of the thermometer depends upon this principle of unequal expansibility of different bodies. A great variety of combinations have been used in the construction of ther- : as J Fig. 151. 264: MECHANICS. mometers, only one of which, the common mercurial ther mometer, will be described. The mercurial thermometer consists of a cylindrical or spherical bulb A, at the upper extremity of which, is a narrow tube of uniform bore, hermetically sealed at its upper end. The bulb and tube are nearly filled with mercury, and the whole is attached to a frame, on which is a scale for deter- mining the temperature, which is indicated by the rise and fall of the mercury in the tube. The tube should be of uniform bore through- out, and, when this is the case, it is found that the relative expansion of the mercury and glass is very nearly uniform for constant increments of temperature. A thermometer maybe constructed and graduated as follows : A tube of uniform Lore is selected, and upon one extremity a bulb is blown, which may be cylindrical or spherical ; the former shape is, on many accounts, the preferable one. At the other extremity, a conical-shaped funnel is blown open at the top. The funnel is filled with mercury, which should be of the purest quality, and the whole being held vertical, the heat of a spirit-lamp is applied to the bulb, which expand- ing the air contained in it, forces a portion in bubbles up through the mercury in the funnel. The instrument is next allowed to cool, when a portion of mercury is forced down the capillary tube into the bulb. By a repetition of this process, the entire bulb may be filled with mercury, as well as the tube itself. Heat is then applied to the bulb, until the mercury is made to boil ; and, on being cooled down to a little above the highest temperature which it is desired to measure, the top of the tube is melted off by means of a jet of flame, urged by a blow-pipe, and the whole is her- metically sealed. The instrument, thus prepared, is attached to a frame, and graduated as follows: The instrument is plunged into a bath of melting ice, and, after being allowed to remain a sufficient time for the MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 2G5 parts of the instrument to take the uniform temperature of the melting ice, the height of the mercury in the tube is marked on the scale. This gives the freezing point of the scale. The instrument is next plunged into a bath of boiling water, and allowed to remain long enough for all of the parts to acquire the temperature of the water and steam. The height of the mercury is then marked on the scale. This gives the boiling point of the scale. The freezing and boiling points having been determined, the intermediate space is divided into a certain number of equal parts, according to the scale adopted, and the graduation is then continued, both upwards and downwards, to any desired extent. Three principal scales are used. Fahrenheit's scale, in which the space between the freezing and boiling point is divided into ISO equal parts, called degrees, the freezing point being marked 32°, and the boiling point 212°. In this scale, the point is 32 degrees below the freezing point. The Centigrade scale, in which the space between the fixed points is divided into 100 equal parts, called degrees. The of this scale is at the freezing point. Reaumur's scale, in which the same space is divided into 80 equal parts, called degrees. The of this scale also is at the freezing point. If we denote the number of degrees on the Fahrenheit, Centigrade, and Reaumur scales, by F, C, and R respec- tively, the following formula will enable us to j:>ass from any one of these scales to any other : ±{F° -32) = \C° = Ji2°. The scale most in use in this country is Fahrenheit's The other two are much used in Europe, particularly the Centigrade scale. Velocity of a liquid flowing through a small orifice. 173. Let ABD represent a vessel, having a very small orifice at its bottom, and filled with any liquid. 12 266 MECHANICS. Denote the area of the orifice, by a, and its depth below the upper surface, by h. Let D represent an infinitely small layer of the liquid situated nt the orifice, and denote its height, by h '. This layer is (Art. 155) urged down- wards by a force equal to the weight of a column of the liquid whose base is equal to the orifice, and whose height is h ; denoting this pressure, by p, and the weight of a unit of volume of the liquid, by 10, we shall have, p = wah. If the element is pressed downwards by its own weight alone, this pressure being denoted by^', we have, p — wah!. Dividing the former equation by the latter, member by member, we have, p h p' ~ A ,; that is, the pressures are to each other as the heights h and h'. AVere the element to fall through the small height h\ under the action of the pressure^', or its own weight, the velocity generated would (Art. 115) be given by the equation, v' -.= y2gh'. Denoting the velocity actually generated whilst the ele- ment is falling throught the height h\ by r, and recol- lecting that the velocities generated in falling through a MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 267 given height, are to each other as the square roots of the pressures, we shall have, v : v' : : y ' p : V^/, .'. v = v' \J ~, • Substituting for v' its value, just deduced, and for — , its h p value, — , we have (150.) Hence, we conclude that a liquid loill issue from a very small orifice at the bottom of the containing vessel, with a velocity equal to that acquired by a heavy body in falling freely through a height equal to the depth of the orifice below the surface of the fluid. We have seen that the pressure due to the weight of a fluid upon any point of the surface of the containing vessel, is normal to the surface, and is always proportional to the depth of the point below the level of the free surface. Hence, if the side of a vessel be thin, so as not to affect the flow of the liquid, and an orifice be made at any point, the liquid will flow out in a jet, normal to the surface at the opening, and with a velocity due to a height equal to that of the orifice from the free surface of the fluid. If the orifice is on the vertical side of a vessel, the initial direction of the jet will be horizontal ; if it be made at a point where the tangent plane is oblique to the horizon, the initial direction of the jet will be oblique ; if the opening is made on the upper side of a por- tion of a vessel where the tangent is horizontal, the jet will be directed upwards, and will rise to a height due to the velocity ; that is, to the height of the Fig. 158. upper surface of the fluid. This T """%B D f- <' Y" -^0 268 MECHANIC?. can be illustrated experimentally, by introducing a tube near the bottom of a vessel of water, and bending its outer extremity upwards, when the fluid will be observed to rise to the level of the upper surface of the water in the vessel. Spouting of Liquids on a Horizontal Plane. 174. Let KL represent a vessel lilled with water. Let D represent an orifice in its ver- tical side, and BE the path described by the spouting fluid. We may regard each drop of water as it issues from the orifice, as a projectile shot forth hori- fcSl-— —^'jl 7 zontally, and then acted upon by ^^ ■ '''' ~^~iy the force of gravity. Its path « ^ will, therefore, be a parabola, and the circumstances of its motion will be made known by a discussion of Equations (115) and (120). Denote the distance BK, by A', and the distance BL, by h. TVe have, from Equation (120), by making y equal to h\ and x = KE, ■*„ KE = 9 But we have found that v = V 2gh ; hence, by substitu- tion, we have, KE = 2V M 7 - If we describe a semicircle on EL, as a diameter, and through D draw an ordinate BIT, we shall have, from a well-known property of the circle, BII = y/BK.BL = Hence we have, by substitution, KE = 2BH. MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 269 Since there are two points on KL at which the ordinates are equal, it follows that there are two oririces through which the fluid will spout to the same distance on the horizontal plane ; one of these will be as far above the centre 0, as the other is below it. If the orifice be at 0, midway between K and Z, the ordinate OS will be the greatest possible, and the range KE' will be a maximum. The range in this case will be equal to the diameter of the circle LHK, or to the distance from the level of the water in the vessel to the horizontal plane. If a semi-parabola EE'be described, having its axis ver- tical, its vertex at X, and focus at iT, then may every point P, within the curve, be reached by two separate jets issuing from the side of the vessel ; every point on the curve can be reached by one, and only one ; whilst points lying without the curve cannot be reached by any jet whatever. If the jet is directed obliquely upwards by a short pipe A (Fig. 153), the path described by each particle will still be the arc of a parabola ABC. Since each particle of the liquid may be regarded as a body projected obliquely up- ward, the nature of the path and the circumstances of the motion will be given by Equation ( 115 ). In like manner, a discussion of the same equation will make known the nature of the path and the circumstances of motion, when the jet is directed obliquely downwards by means of a short tube. Modifications due to extraneous pressure. 175. If we suppose the upper surface of the liquid, in any of the preceding cases, to be pressed by any force, as when it is urged downwards by a piston, we may denote the height of a column of fluid whose weight is equal to the ex- traneous pressure, by h '. The velocity of efflux will then be given by the equation, v = V2ff(A + h')< 270 MECHANICS. The pressure of the atmosphere acts equally on the upper surface and the surface of the opening ; hence, in ordinary cases, it may be neglected ; but were the water to flow into a vacuum, or into rarefied air, the pressure must be taken into account, and this may be done by means of the formula just given. Should the flow take place into condensed air, or into any medium which opposes a greater resistance than the atmos- pheric pressure, the extraneous pressure would act upwards, ti would be negative, and the preceding formula would become, v = \^2g(h — A'), Coefficients of Efflux and Velocity. 176. When a vessel empties itself through a small orifice at its bottom, it is observed that the particles of fluid near the top descend in vertical lines; when they approach the bottom they incline towards the orifice, the converging lines of fluid particles tending to cross each other as they emerge from the vessel. The result is, that the stream grows nar- rower, after leaving the vessel, until it reaches a point at a distance from the vessel equal to about the radius of the orifice, when the contraction becomes a minimum, and below that point the vein again spreads out. This phenomenon is called the contraction of the vein. The cross section at the most contracted part of the vein, is not far from T \\ of the area of the orifice, when the vessel is very thin. If we de- note the area of the orifice, by a, and the area of the least cross section of the vein, by a', we shall have, a' = ka, in which k is a number 10 be determined by experiment. This number is called the coefficient of contraction. To find the quantity of water discharged through an ori- fice at the bottom of the containing vessel, in a second, we have only to multiply the area of the smallest cross section MECHANICS OF LIQUIDS. 271 of the vein, by the velocity. Denoting the quantity dis- charged in one second, by Q\ we shall have, Q' = ha \/2(/h. This formula is only true on the supposition that the actual velocity is equal to the theoretical velocity, which is not the case, as has been shown by experiment. The theo- retical velocity has been shown to be equal to y^A, and if we denote the actual velocity, by v\ we shall have, in which I is to be determined by experiment ; this value of I is slightly less than 1, and is called the coefficient of veloc- ity. In order to get the actual discharge, we must replace ■\/2gh by l\^2(/h, in the preceding equation. Doing so, and denoting the actual discharge per second, by Q, Ave have. The product hi, is called the coefficient of efflux. It has been shown by experiment, that this coefficient for orifices in thin plates, is not quite constant. It decreases slightly, as the area of the orifice and the velocity are increased ; and it is further found to be greater for circular orifices than for those of any other shape. If we denote the coefficient of efflux, by ?n, we have, In this equation, h is called the head of water. Hence, we may define the head of water to be the distance from the orifice to the piano, of the upper surface of the fluid. The mean value of m corresponding to orifices of from | to 6 inches in diameter, with from 4 to 20 feet head of 272 MKCIIANICS. water, has been found to be about .615. If we take the value of k = .64, we shall have, m .615 1 = k = MO = ^ That is, the actual velocity is only T 9 y 6 y of the theoretical velocity. This diminution is due to friction, viscosity, the atmosphere is called the barometric column, because it is generally measured by an instrument called a barometer. In fact, the instrument just described, when MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 287 provided with a suit able scale for measuring the altitude of the column, is 1 complete barometer. The height of the barometric column fluctuates somewhat, even at the same place, on account of changes of temperature, and other causes yet to be considered. Observation has shown, that the average height of the barometric column at the level of the sea, is a trifle less than 30 inches. The weight of a column of mercury 30 inches in height, having a cross section of one square inch, is nearly 15 pounds. Hence, the unit of atmospheric pressure at the level of the sea, is 15 pounds. This unit is called an atmosphere, and is often employed in estimating the pressure of elastic fluids, particularly in the case of steam. Hence, to say that the pressure of steam in a boiler is two atmospheres, is equivalent to saying, that there is a pressure of 30 pounds upon each square inch of the interior of the boiler. In general, when we say that the tension of a gas or vapor is n atmospheres, we mean that each square inch is pressed by a force of n times 15 pounds. Mariotte's Law. 189. When a given mass of any gas or vapor is com- pressed so as to occupy a smaller space, other things being- equal, its elastic force is increased ; on the contrary, if its volume is increased, its elastic force is diminished. The law of increase and diminution of elastic force, first discovered by Mariotte, and bearing his name, may be enunciated as follows : The elastic force of a given mass of any gas, ichose tem- perature 'remains the same, varies inversely as the volume which it occupies. , As long as the mass remains the same, the density must vary inversely as the volume occupied. Hence, from Mari- otte's Law, it follows, that, The elastic force of any gas, whose temperature remains the same, varies as its density, and conversely, the density varies as the elastic force. ITTd p P K li ■ c 2S8 MECHANICS. Mariotte's law may be verified in the case of atmosplierio air, by the aid of an instrument called Mamotte's Tube. This instrument consists of a tube AH CD, of uniform bore* bent so that its two branches are parallel to each other. The shorter branch AP, is closed at its upper extremity, whilst the longer one remains open for the reception of mercury. Between the two branches of the tube, and attached to the same frame with it, is a scale of equal parts for measuring distances. To use the instrument, place it in a vertical position, and pour mercury into the tube, until it just cuts off the communication between the two branches The mercury will then stand at the same level PC, in both branches, and the tension of the confined air in AB, will be exactly equal to that of the external atmosphere. If an additional quantity of mer- cury be poured into the longer branch, the confined air in the shorter branch will be compressed, and the mercury will rise in both branches, but higher in the longer, than in the shorter one. Suppose the mercury to have risen in the shorter branch, to K, and in the longer one, to P. There will be an equilibrium in the mercury lying below the hori- zontal plane KK; there will also be an equilibrium between the tension of the air in AK, and the forces which give rise to that tension. These forces are the pressure of the exter- nal atmosphere transmitted through the mercury, and the weight of a column of mercury whose base is the cross-sec- tion of the tube, and whose altitude is PK. If we denote the height of the column of mercury which will be sustained by the pressure of the external atmosphere, by h, the ten- sion of the air in AK, will be measured by the weight of a column of mercury, whose base is the cross-section of the* tube, an3 whose height is li + PK. Since the weight is proportional to the height, the tension of the confined air will be proportional to h -f- PK. Now, whatever may be the value of PK, it is found that, MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 289 AB . h AK = h + PK If PK = h, we shall have, AK '= 1.4J5; if P/iT= 2A, we shall have, ^4A" = %AB ; in general, if PK = nA, w being any positive number, either entire or fractional, we AB shall have, AK — • Mariotte's Law was verified in this manner by Dulong and Arago for all values of w, up to n — 27. The law may also be verified when the pres- sure is less than an atmosphere, by means of the following apparatus. - AK represents a straight tube of uniform bore, closed at its upper and open at its lower extremity : CD is a long cistern of mercury. The tube AK is either graduated into equal parts, commencing at A, or it has attached to it a scale of brass or ivory. To use the instrument, pour mercury into the tube till it is nearly full ; place the finger over the open end, and invert it in the cistern of mer- cury, and depress it till the mercury stands at the same level without, as within the tube, and suppose the surface of the mercury in this case Fig; 164 to cut the tube at B. Then will the tension of the confined air in AB, be equal to that of the external atmosphere. If now the tube be raised vertically, the air in AB will expand, its tension will diminish and the mercury will fall in the tube, to maintain the equlibrium. Suppose the level of the mercury in the tube to have reached the point K In this position of the instrument the tension of the air in AK, added to the weight of the column of mer- cury, KE will be equal to the tension of the external air. Now, it is found, whatever may be the value of KE, that r,A L B h-EK 13 290 MECHANICS. If EK = iA, we have, AK = 2AB; if EK :, §A, we have, w4/r = 3^4^; in general, if EK = A, we have, ATI ft + 1 ' n + 1 aIakiotte's law has been verified in this manner, for all values of n, up to n — 111. It is a law of Physics that, when a gas is suddenly com- pressed, heat is evolved, and when a gas is suddenly ex- panded, heat is absorbed ; hence, in making the experiment, care must be taken to have the temperature kept uniform. Gay Lussac's Law. 190. If, whilst the volume of any gas or vapor remains the same, its temperature be increased, its tension is in- creased also. If the pressure remain the same, the volume of the gas will increase as the temperature is raised. The law of increase and diminution, as deduced by Gay Lussac, whose name it bears, may be enunciated as follows : In a given mass of any gas, or vapor, if the volume remains the same, the tension varies as the temperature / if the tension remains the same, the volume varies as the tem- perature. According to Regnault, if a given mass of atmospheric air be heated from 32° Fahrenheit to 212°, the tension, or pressure remaining constant, its volume will be increased by the .3G65th part of the volume at 32°. Hence, the increase of volume for each degree of temperature is the .00204th part of the volume at 32°. If we denote the volume at 32° by v, and the volume at the temperature t\ by v', we si all there- fore have, v' = v[l + .00204(2'- 32)] . . ( 152.) Solving with reference to v, we have, v' " 1 + .00204(2'- 32) (lo3.) Formula (153) enables us to compute the volume of any MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPOWS. 291 mass of air at 32°, knowing its volume at the temperature t\ the pressure remaining constant. To find the volume at the temperature t", we have simply to substitute t" for t' in (152.) Denoting this volume by v'\ we have, V"= v[l + .00204(£" — 32)]. Substituting for v its value from (153), we get, ,1 4- .00204(r— 32) 1 + .00204(£' - 32) (154.) This formula enables us to compute the volume of any mass of air, at a temperature t", when we know its volume at the temperature t' ; and, since the density varies in- versely as the volume, we may also, by means of the same formula, find the density of any mass of air, at the temper- ature t'\ when we have given its density at the tempera- ture t\ Manometers. 191. A manometer is an instrument used for measuring the tension of gases and vapors, and particularly of steam. Two principle varieties of manometers are used for measur- ing the tension of steam, the open manometer, and the dosed manometer. The open Manometer. 192. The open manometer consists, essentially, of an open glass tube A J?, terminating below, nearly at the bottom of a cistern EF. The cistern is of wrought iron, steam tight, and filled with mercury. Its dimen- sions are such, that the upper surface of the mercury will not be materially lowered, when a portion of the mercury is forced up the tube. ED is a tube, by means of which, steam may be admitted from the boiler to the surface of the mercury in the cistern. This tube is sometimes filled with Fig. 165. lb 292 MECHANICS. water, through which the pressure of the steam is trans mitted to the mercury. To graduate the instrument. All communication with the boiler is cut off", by closing the stop-cock E, and commu- nication with the external air is made by opening the stop- cock I). The point of the tube AB, to which the mercury rises, is noted, and a distance is laid off", upwards, from this point, equal to what the barometric column wants of 30 inches, and the point .//"thus determined, is marked 1. This point will be very near the surface of the mercury in the cistern. From the point II, distances of 30, 60, 90, &c, inches are laid off upwards, and the corresponding points numbered 2, 3, 4, &c. These divisions correspond to atmospheres, and may be subdivided into tenths and hundredths. To use the instrument, the stop-cock D is closed, and a communication made with the boiler, by opening the stop- cock E. The height to which the mercury rises in the tube, will indicate the tension of the steam in the boiler, which may be read from the scale in terms of atmospheres and decimals of an atmosphere. If the pressure in pounds is wished, it may at once be found, by multiplying the reading of the instrument by 15. The principal objection to this kind of manometer, is its want of portability, and the great length of tube required, when high tensions are to be measured. The closed Manometer. 193. The general construction of the closed manometer is the same as that of the open manometer, with the excep- tion that the tube AB is closed at the top. The air which is confined in the tube, is then compressed in the same way as in Makiotte's tube. To graduate this instrument, We determine the division II, as before. The remaining divisions are found by apply- ing Mariotte's law. Denote the distance in inches, from II to the top of the MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 293 tube, by I; the pressure on the mercury, expressed in atmospheres, by ?i, and the distance in inches, from II to the upper surface of the mercury in the tube, by x. The tension of the air in the tube will be equal to that on the mercury in the cistern, diminished by the weight of a column of mercury, whose altitude is x. Hence, in atmos- pheres, it is x The bore of the tube being uniform, the volume occupied by the compressed air will be proportional to its height. When the pressure is 1 atmosphere, the height is £; when x the pressure is n atmospheres, the height is I — x. Hence, from Mariotte's law, X 7 7 1 : n — — : : I — x : I . 30 Whence, by reduction, x> _ (30rc H- l)x = — 30l(n — 1). Solving, w T ith respect to cc, w r e have, SOn + 1 , / ~T, ~ , /30^ + A 2 x — The upper sign of the radical is not used, as it would give a value for x, greater than /. Taking the lower sign, and, a? a particular case, assuming I — 30 in., we have, x - 15^ +-15 — y/ — 900(n — 1) + {Ion + 15) 2 . Making n = 2, 3, 4, &c, in succession, we find for x, the corresponding values, 11.46 in., 17.58 in., 20.92 in., &c. These distances being set off from II, upwards, and marked 2, 3, 4, , the upper portion of the cistern, made of glass, that the surface of the mercury may be seen; Tv, a conical piece of ivory, pro- jecting from the upper surface of the cistern : when the surface of the mercury just touches the point of the ivory, it is -it the of the scale; CC represents the Lower part of the cifftern, and is made of leather, or some other Fi 17(| • p~T; r rk Q 1[ J) Fig. 169. r A 15 \ a I TT MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 297 flexible substance, and firmly attached to the glass part ; J) is a screw, working through the bottom of the frame, and against the bottom of the bag (7(7, through the medium of a plate P. The screw D, serves to bring the surface of the mercury to the point of the ivory piece E, and also to force the mercury up to the top of the tube, when it is desired to transport the barometer from place to place. To use this barometer, it should be suspended vertically, and the level of the mercury in the cistern brought to the point of the ivory piece E, by means of the screw D ; \ a smart rap with a key upon the frame will detach the mer- cury from the glass to which it sometimes tends to adhere. The sliding ring jV, is next run up or down by means of the screw J/, till its lower edge appears tangent to the upper surface of the mercury in the tube, and the altitude is read from the scale. The height of the attached thermometer should also be noted. The requirements of a good barometer are, sufficient width of tube, perfect purity of the mercury, and a scale with a vernier accurately graduated and adjusted. The bore of the tube should be as large as practicable, to diminish the effect of capillary action. On account of the mutual repulsion between the particles of the glass and mer- cury, the mercury is depressed in the tube, and this depres- sion increases as the diameter of the tube diminishes. In all cases, this depression should be allowed for, and corrected by means of a table computed for the purpose. To secure purity of the mercury, it should be carefully distilled, and after the tube is filled, it should be boiled over a spirit-lamp, to drive off any bubbles of air that might ad- here to the walls of the tube. Uses of the Barometer. 199. The primary object of the barometer is, to meas- ure the pressure of the atmosphere at any time or place. It is used by mariners and others, as a weather-glass. It is also extensively employed for determining the heights of points on the earth's surface, above the level of the ocean. 13* 298 MECHANICS. The principle on which it is employed for the latter pur pose is, that the pressure of the atmosphere at any place depends upon the weight of a column of air reaching from the place to the upper limit of the atmosphere. As we as- cend above the level of the ocean, the weight of the column diminishes ; consequently, the pressure becomes less, a tact which is shown by the mercury falling in the tube. We shall investigate a formula for determining the difference of level between any two points. Difference of Level. 200. Let aB represent a portion of a vertical prism of air, whose cross-section is one square inch. De- note the pressure on the lower base .2?, by p, and on the upper base aa\ by p' ; denote the density of the air at JB y by <7, and at aa\ by d\ and sup- pose the temperature throughout the column to be 32° Fah. Pass a horizontal plane bb\ infinitely near to (/'/', and denote the weight of the elementary F1 m volume of air ob, by to. Conceive the entire column to be divided by horizontal planes into elementary prisms, such that the weights of each shall be equal to w, and denote their heights, beginning at «, by s, s\ s", &c. From Makiotte's law, we shall have, y _ f = z (V _ ) ; or finally, | = l(p> + w) - lp\ in which I denotes the Napierian logarithm. In this equation, p' denotes the pressure on the prism ab ; hence, p' -f uo denotes the pressure on the next prism below, that is, on the prism be. w If we substitute this value of — in Equation (155), we shall have, for the height of the prism ab, Substituting in succession for p', the values p'-\- w,p' + 2w>, p' + 3w, &c, we shall find the heights of the elementary prisms be, ed, &v.. Wo shall therefore have, 300 MECHANICS. 8 = !k [l{pf+ ^-^ * n '= J^P(*'+ nw? ) - ? 0p' + ( ;i - WJ- If w denote the number of elementary prisms in AB, the sum of the first members will be equal to AB. Adding the equations member to member, and denoting the sum of the first members by 2, we have, Because nw denotes the weight of the column of nil A 2?, we shall have, p' + nw = p, hence, «= %-l£ (150.) dg p' Denoting ihe modulus of the common system of loga- rithms by 31, and designating common logarithms by the symbol log, we shall have, Mz = §- log ^ , or z = J?— log ^ • dg G y Mdg & p' Now, the pressures jo and// are measured by the heights of the columns of mercury which they will support; denoting these heights by JET and II, we have, p _ II p ' ~ II' ' MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 301 whence, by substitution, z = ik los ^ r • * ' (157,) We have supposed the temperature, both of the air and mercury, to be 32°. In order to make the preceding for- mula general, let T represent the temperature of the mer- cury at B, T\ its temperature at a T and denote the cor- responding heights of the barometric column by h and h f ; also, let t denote the temperature of the air at B, and t' its temperature at a. t) The quantity is the ratio of the density of the air at B, to the corresponding pressure, the temperature being 32°. According to Mariotte's law, this ratio remains constant, whatever may be the altitude of B aK*\ o the level of the ocean. If we denote the latitude of the ph^o by £, we have, (Art. 124), g - g'{\ — 0.002695 cos2 7, l It has been shown, by experiment, that, vl^n a column of mercury is heated, it increases in length at thp. iV-e of t9 ' 90 ths of its length at 32°, for each degree th^t the + ^)m- perature is elevated. Hence, *(> + ^?)-* K T' -32\ „., 9990 + T'-S2 V T 9990 / 9990 Dividing the second equation by the first, member by member, Ji_ II 9990 -f T— 32 h' ~ II'' 9990 + T— 32 * 302 MECHANICS. TT Dividing both terms of the fractional coefficient of ■= by the denominator, and neglecting the quantity T — 32, in comparison with 9990, we have, * = 5£ + ^) - a* +-™> <*•-** Whence, by reduction, H_ _ h_ 1 H' " A'*l + .0001 (T- T') ' The quantity z denotes, not only the height, but also the volume of the column of air aB, at 32°. When the tem- perature is changed from 32°, the pressures remaining the same, this volume will vary, according to the law of Gay Lussac. If we suppose the temperature of the entire column to be a mean between the temperatures at B and cz, which we may do without sensible error, the height of the column will become, Equation (153), S [~1 + .00204 ^y~ - 32 Yl = z[l+.00102(* + «'- 64)] Hence, to adapt Equation (157) to the conditions pro- posed, we must multiply the value of 2 by the factor, 1 + .00102(0 + t'- 64). Substituting in Equation (157), for — and , we shall have, Q-Aphxl(P) = Aphxl(^\ . (160.) If we denote by c the number of cubic feet of gas, when the pressure is p, and suppose it to expand till the pressure is y, we shall have, Ah = c ; or, if A be expressed in square Ah feet, we shall have, c = Hence, by substitution, '144 ' J Finally, if we suppose the pressure at the high< st point to he p', we shall have, 0. = a«qpX/f(Jp), 306 MECHANICS. an equation which gives the quantity of work ot c cubic feet of gas, whilst expanding from a pressure p, to a pres- sure })'. Efflux of a Gas or Vapor. 202. Suppose the gas to escape from a small orifice, and denote its velocity by v. Denote the weight of a cubic foot of the gas, by w, and the number of cubic feet dis- charged in one second, by c, then will the mass escaping in cw one second, be equal to — , and its living force will be cw equal to — v 2 . But, from Art. 148, the living force is double the accumulated quantity of work. If, therefore, we denote the accumulated work by §, we shall have, r\ cw 2 Q = —v. * 2g But the accumulated work is due to the expansion of the gas, and if we denote the pressure within the orifice, by p y and without, by^', we shall have, from Art. 201, q = lucp x i(^y Equating the second members, we have, ™v' = lUcpxl(£) Whence, •-»>/¥*<£) Substituting for g, its value, 32i ft., we have, aftei reduction, 96 v^¥) • • • < i6i > MECHANICS OF GASES AND VArURS. 307 When the difference between p and p' is small, the pre- ceding formula can be simplified. Since — = 1 + ^ ~ , we have, from the logarithmic p p series, When p —p' is very small, the second, and all succeeding terms of the development, may be neglected, in comparison with the first term. Hence, © p-p P Substituting, in the formula above deduced, we have, V to p or, since — is, under the supposition just made, equal to 1, we have, finally, v = 96 v 7 ^ ("*> Coefficient of Efflux. 203. When air issues from an orifice, the section of the current undergoes a change of form, analagous to the con- traction of the vein in liquids, and for similar reasons. If we denote the coefficient of efflux, by ft, the area of the orifice, by A, and the quantity of air delivered in n seconds, by Q, we shall have, from Equation (161), Q = w^vf^O • MECHANICS. According to Koch, the value of k is equal to .58, when the orifice is in a thin plate ; equal to .74, when the air issues through a tube 6 times as long as it is wide ; and equal to .85, when it issues through a conical nozzle 5 times as long as the diameter of the oritice, and whose sides have a convergence of 6° to the axis. The preceding principles are applicable to the distribution of gas, to the construction of blowers, and, in general, to a great variety of pneumatic machines. Steam. 204. If water be exposed to the atmosphere, at ordinary temperatures, a portion is converted into vapor, which mixes with the atmosphere, constituting one of the permanent elements of the aerial ocean. The tension of watery vapor thus formed, is very slight, and the atmosphere soon ceases to absorb any more. If the temperature of the water be raised, an additional amount of vapor is evolved, and of greater tension. When the temperature is raised to that point at which the tension of the vapor is equal to that of the atmosphere, ebullition commences, and the vaporization goes on with great rapidity. If heat be added beyond the point of ebullition, neither the water nor the vapor will increase in temperature till all of the water is converted into steam. When the barometer stands at 30 inches, the boil- ing point of pure water is 212° Fab. We shall suppose, in what follows, that the barometer stands at 30 inches. After the temperature of the water is raised to 212°, the addi- tional heat that is added becomes latent in the vapor evolved. If heat be applied uniformly, it is found by experiment thai it takes 5i times as much to convert all of the water into Steam as it requires to raise it from :",2° to 212°. Hence, the entire amount of heat which becomes latent is 5^ X (212° — 32°) = 990°. That the heat applied becomes latent, may be shown experimentally as follows : Let a cubic inch of water be converted into steam at MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 309 212°, and kept in a close vessel. Now, if 5^ cubic inches of water at 32° be injected into the vessel, the steam will all be converted into water, and the 6^ cubic inches of water will be found to have a temperature of 212". The heat that was latent becomes sensible again. When water is converted into steam under any other pressure than that of the atmosphere, or 15 pounds to the square inch, it is found that, although the boiling point will be changed, the entire amount of heat required for convert- ing the water into steam will remain unchanged. If the evaporation takes place under such a pressure, that the boiling point is but 150°, the amount of heat which becomes latent is 1052°, so that the latent heat of the steam, plus its sensible heat, is 1202°. If the pressure under which vaporization takes place is such as to raise the boiling point to 500°, the amount of heat which becomes latent is 702°, the sum 702° + 500° being equal to 1202°, as before. Hence, we conclude that the same amount of fuel is required to convert a given amount of water into steam, no matter what may be the pressure under which the evapora- tion takes place. When water is converted into steam under a pressure of one atmosphere, each cubic inch is expanded into about 1700 cubic inches of steam, of the temperature of 212° ; or, since a cubic foot contains 1728 cubic inches, we may say, in round numbers, that a cubic inch of xoater is converted into a cubic foot of steam. If water is converted into steam under a greater or less pressure than one atmosphere, the density will be increased or diminished, and, consequently, the volume will be dimin- ished or increased. The temperature being also increased or diminished, the increase of density or decrease of volume will not be exactly proportional to the increase of pressure ; but, for purposes of approximation, we may consider the densities as directly, and the volumes as inversely propor- tional to the pressures under which the steam is generated. Under this hypothesis, if a cubic inch of water be evapo- 310 MECHANICS. rated under a pressure of a half atmosphere, it will afford two cubic feet of steam; if generated under a pressure of two atmospheres, it will only afford a half cubic foot of steam. Work of Steam. 205. When water is converted into steam, a certain amount of work is generated, and, from what has been shown, this amount of work is very nearly the same, whatever may be the temperature at which the water is evaporated. Suppose a cylinder, whose cross-section is one square inch, to contain a cubic inch of water, above which is an air- tight piston, that may be loaded with weights at pleasure. In the first place, if the piston is pressed down by a weight of 15 pounds, and the inch of water converted into steam, tha weight will be raised to the height of 1728 inches, or 144 feet. Hence, the quantity of work is 144 x 15, or, 2160 units. Again, if the piston be loaded with a weight of 30 pounds, the conversion of water into steam will give but 864 cubic inches, and the weight will be raised through 72 feet. In this case, the quantity of work will be 72 x 30, or 2160 units, as before. We conclude, therefore, that the quantity of work is the same, or nearly so, whatever may be the pressure under which the steam is generated. We also conclude, that the quantity of work is nearly proportional to the fuel consumed. Besides the quantity of work developed by simply con- verting an amount of water into steam, a further quantity of work is developed by allowing the steam to expand after entering the cylinder. This principle is made use of in steam engines working expansively. To find the quantity of work developed by steam acting ex- pansively. Let AJ3 represent a cylinder, closed at A, and having an air-tight piston D. Suppose the steam to enter at the bottom of the cylinder, and to push the piston upward to (7, and then suppose the opening at which the steam enters, to be closed. If the piston is not too heavily loaded, the steam will continue to expand, and the piston Fig m MECHANICS OF GASES AND VAPORS. 311 will be raised to some position, B. The expansive force of the steam will obey Mariotte's law, and the quantity of work due to expansion will be given by Equation ( 1G0). Denote the area of the piston in square inches, by A ; the pressure of the steam on each square inch, up to the moment when the communication is cut oft*, by p ; the distance A C, through which the piston moves before the steam is cut oft*, by A ; and the distance AD, by nh. If we denote the pressure on each square inch, when the piston arrives at J5, by p\ we shall have, by Mariotte's law, P p : p f : : nh : A, . • . p' — — , an expression which gives the limiting value of the load of the piston. The quantity of work due to expansion being denoted by 2, we shall have, from Equation (160), q = Aph x I (-7- ) — Aphl (n)* If we denote the quantity of work of the steam, whilst the piston is rising to (7, by q", we shall have, q" = Aph. Denoting the total quantity of work during the entire stroke of the piston, by Q, we shall have, Q = Aph[l -f l(n)] . . . (163.) Experimental Formulas. 206. Numerous experiments have been made for the purpose of determining the relation existing between the elasticity and temperature of steam in contact with the water by which it is produced, and many formulas, based 312 MECHANICS. upon these experiments, have been given, two of which arc subjoined : The formula of Duloxg and Arago is, p = (1 + .007153*) 3 , in which p represents the tension in atmospheres, and t the excess of the temperature above 100° Centigrade. Tredgold's formula is, t = 0.85 y^ — 75, in which t is the temperature, in degrees of the Centigrade thermometer, and p the pressure, expressed in centimeters of the mercurial column. HYDRAULIC AND PXIXMATIC MACHINES. 313 CHAPTEE IX. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINE8. Definitions. 207. Hydraulic machines are those used in raising and distributing water, such as pumps, siphons, hydraulic rams, &c. The name is also applied to those machines in which water power is the motor, or in which water is employed to transmit pressures, such as water-wheels, hydraulic presses, &c. Pneumatic machines are those employed to rarefy and condense air, or to impart motion to the air, such as air- pumps, ventilating-blowers, , the distance from the upper surface of the water in the reservoir to the highest position of the piston, by «, and the height at which the water ceases to rise in the pump, by x. The distance from the surface of the water in the pump to the highest position of the piston will then be equal to a — se, and the distance to the lowest position of the piston, will be a — p — x. Denote the height at which the atmospheric pressure will sustain a column of water in vacuum, by A, and the weight of a column of water, whose base is the cross-section of the pump, and whose altitude is 1, by w ; then will wh denote the pressure of the atmosphere exerted upwards through the water in the reservoir and pump. Xow, when the piston is at its lowest position, in order that it may not thrust open the piston valve and escape, the pressure of the confined air must be exactly equal to that of the external atmosphere; that is, equal to ich. When the 316 MECHANICS. piston is at its highest position, the confined air will be rare- fied, the volume occupied being proportional to its height. Denoting the pressure of the rarefied air by toh\ we shall have from Mariotte's law, wh : wh' :: a — x : a — p — x. • wh' = wh a — x If the water does not rise when the piston is at its highest position, the pressure of the rarefied air, plus the weight of the column already raised, will be equal to the pressure of the external atmosphere; or a — p — x wh + wx = wh. a — x Solving this equation with respect to #, we have, If we have, _ a ± yet? — 4ph Aph > a 2 ; or, p > -^ , the value of x will be imaginary, and there will be no point at which the water will cease to rise. Hence, the, above inequality expresses the relation that must exist, in order that the pump may be eifective. This condition expressed in words, gives the following rule : The pump will be effective, when the play of the piston is greater tl(>fffft.; or, p>2^it. To find the quantity of work required to make a double stroke of the piston, after the water reaches the level of the spout. In depressing the piston, no force is required, except that necessary to overcome the inertia of the parts and the fric- tion. Neglecting these for the present, the quantity of work in the downward stroke, may be regarded as 0. In raising the piston, its upper surface will be pressed down- wards, by the pressure of the atmosphere w7i, plus the weight of the column of water from the piston to the spout ; and it will be pressed upwards, by the pressure of the atmosphere, transmitted through the pump, minus the weight of a column of water, whose cross-section is equal to that of the barrel, and whose altitude is the distance from the piston to the surface of the water in the reservoir. If we subtract the latter pressure from the former, the difference will be the resultant downward pressure. This difference will be equal to the weight of a column of water, whose base is the cross-section of the barrel, and whose height is the distance of the spout above the reservoir. Denoting the height by If, the pressure will be equal to wH. The path through which the pressure is exerted during the ascent of the piston, is equal to the play of the piston, or p. Denoting the quantity of work required, by Q, we shall have, Q = wpll. But wp is the weight of a volume of water, whose base is the cross-section of the barrel, and whose altitude is the play of the piston. Hence, the value of Q is equal to the 31S MECHANICS. quantity of work necessary to raise this volume of watei from the level of the water in the reservoir to the spout. This volume is evidently equal to the volume actually delivered at each double stroke of the piston. Hence, the quantity of work expended in pumping with the sucking and lifting pump, all hurtful resistances being neglected, is equal to the quantity of work necessary to lift the amount of water, actually delivered, from the level of the water in the reservoir to the height of the spout. In addition to this work, a sufficient amount of power must be exerted, to overcome the hurtful resistances. The disadvantage of this pump, is the irregularity with which the force must act, being in depressing the piston, and a maximum in raising it. This is an important objection when machinery is em- ployed in pumping ; but it may be either partially or entirely overcome, by using two pumps, so arranged, that the piston of one shall ascend as that of the other descends. Another objection to the use of this kind of pump, is the irregularity of flow, the inertia of the column of water having to be overcome at each upward stroke. This, by creating shocks, consumes a portion of the force applied. Sucking and Forcing Pump. 210. This pump consists of a cylindrical barrel A, with its attached sucking-pipe B, and sleeping- valve #, as in the pump just discussed. The piston C is solid, and is worked up and down in the barrel by means of a lever F, attached to the piston-rod D. At the bottom of the barrel, a branch-pipe leads into an air-vessel K, tli rough a second sleeping-valve J\ which opens upwards, and closes by its own weight. A delivery- pipe 7/", enters the air-vessel at its top, and terminates near its bottom. To explain the action of this Fig. 178. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 319 pump, suppose the piston C to be depressed to its lowest limit. Now, if the piston be raised to its highest position, the air in the barrel will be rarefied, its tension will be diminished, the air in the tube j5, will thrust open the valve, and a portion of it will escape into the barrel. The pres- sure of the external air will then force a column of water up the pipe i?, until the tension of the rarefied air, plus the weight of the column of water raised, is equal to the tension of the external air. An equilibrium being produced, the valve G closes by its own weight. If, now, the piston be again depressed, the air in the barrel will be condensed, its tension will increase till it becomes greater than that of the external air, when the valve F will be thrust open, and a portion of it will escape through the delivery-pipe H. After a few double strokes of the piston, the water will rise through the valve G, and then, as the piston descends, it will be forced into the air-vessel, the air will be condensed in the upper part of the vessel, and, acting by its elastic force, will force a portion of the water up the delivery-pipe and out at the spout P. The object of the air-vessel is, to keep up a continued stream through the pipe H, otherwise it would be necessary to overcome the inertia of the entire column of water in the pipe at every double stroke. The flow having commenced, at each double stroke, a volume of water will be delivered from the spout, equal to that of a cylinder whose base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the play of the piston. The same relative conditions between the parts should exist as in the sucking and lifting pump. To find the quantity of work consumed at each double stroke, after the flow has become regular, hurtful resistances being neglected : When the piston is descending, it is pressed downwards by the tension of the air on its upper surface, and upwards by the tension of the atmosphere, transmitted through the delivery-pipe, plus the weight of a column of water whose base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the 320 MECHANICS. distance of the spout above the piston. This distance is variable during the stroke, but its mean vame is the distance of the middle of the play below the spout. The difference between these pressures is exerted upwards, and is equal to the weight of a column of water whose base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the distance from the middle of the play to the spout. The distance through which the force is exerted, is equal to the play of the piston. Denoting the quantity of work during the descending stroke, by Q' ; the weight of a column of water, having a base equal to the area of the piston, and a unit in altitude, by w; and the height of the spout above the middle of the the play, by A', we shall have, Q' = wh' x p. When the piston is ascending, it is pressed downwards by the tension of the atmosphere on its upper surface, and upwards by the tension of the atmosphere, transmitted through the water in the reservoir and pump, minus the weight of a column of water whose base is the area of the piston, and whose altitude is the height of the piston above the reservoir. This height is variable, but its mean value is the height of the middle of the play above the Mater in the reservoir. The distance through which this force is exerted, is equal to the play of the piston. Denoting the quantity of work during the ascending stroke, by Q'\ and the height of the middle of the play above the reservoir, by A", we have, Q'' = wh" x p. Denoting the entire quantity of work during a double strok by Q, we have, Q = C+ Q" = wp{h> + h"). But irp is the weight of a volume of water, the area of whose base is that of the piston, and whose altitude is the HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 321 play of the piston ; that is, it is the weight of the volume delivered at the spout at each double stroke. The quantity A' + A", is the entire height of the spout above the level of the cistern. Hence, the quantity of work expended, is equal to that required to raise the entire volume delivered, from the level of the water in the reservoir to the height of the spout. To this must be added the work necessary to overcome the hurtful resistances, such as fric- tion, &c. If h' = A", we shall have, Q' = Q" ; that is, the quan- tity of work during the ascending stroke, will be equal to that during the descending stroke. Hence, the work of the motor will be more nearly uniform, when the middle of the play of the piston is at equal distances from the reservoir and spout. Fire Engine. 211. The fire engine is essentially a double sucking and forcing pump, the two piston rods being so connected, that when one piston ascends the other descends. The sucking and delivery pipes are made of some flexible material, gen- erally of leather, and are attached to the machine by means of metallic screw joints. The figure exhibits a cross-section of the essential part of a Fire Engine. A A' are the two barrels, C C the two pistons, con- nected by the rods, D D , with the lever, E E '. B is the sucking pipe, termi- nating in a box from which the water may en- ter either barrel through the valves, G G'. K is the air vessel, common to both pumps, and com- municating with them by the valves F F '. II is the delivery pipe. 14* Fi«t. 17ft. 322 MECHANICS. The instrument is mounted on wheels for convenience of transportation. The lever E E' is worked by means of rods at right angles to the lever, so arranged that several men can apply their strength in working the pump. The action of the pump differs in no respect from that of the forcing pump; but when the instrument is worked vigor- ously, there is more water forced into the air vessel, the tension of the air is very much augmented, and its elastic force, thus brought into play, propels the water to a consider- able distance from the mouth of the delivery pipe. It is this capacity of throwing a jet of water to a great distance, that gives to the engine its value in extinguishing fires. A pump entirely similar to the fire engine in its construc- tion, is often used under the name of the double action forc- ing pump for raising water for other purposes. The Rotary Pump. 212. The rotary pump is a modification of the sucking and forcing pump. Its construction will be best understood from the drawing, which represents a vertical section through the axis of the sucking-pipe, and at right angles to axis of the rotary portion of the pump. A represents an annular ring of metal, which may be made to revolve about its axis 0. D D is a second ring of metal, concentric with the first, and forming with it an inter- mediate annular space. This space communicates with the sucking-pipe 7f, and the de- livery pipe Z. Four radial paddles C\ are disposed so as to slide backwards and for- wards through suitable open- Fig. 177. ings, which are made in the ring A, and which are moved around with it. G is a solid guide, firmly fastened to the end of the cylinder enclosing HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 323 the rotary apparatus, and cut as represented in the figure. E E are two springs, attached to the ring X>, and acting by their elastic force, to press the paddles firmly against the guide. These springs are of such dimensions as not to impede the flow of the water from the pipe Ji, and into the pipe X. When the axis is made to revolve, each paddle, as it reaches and passes the partition II, is pressed against the guide, but, as it moves on, it is forced, by the form of the guide, against the outer wall D. The paddle then drives the air in front of it, around, in the direction of the arrow- head, and finally expels it through the pipe L. The* air behind the paddle is rarefied, and the pressure of the exter- nal air forces a column of water up the pipe. As the paddle approaches the opening to the pipe X, the paddle is pressed back by the spring E, against the guide, and an outlet into the ascending pipe X, is thus provided. After a few revo- lutions, the air is entirely exhausted from the pipe K. The water enters the channel C C, and is forced up the pipe X, from which it escapes by a spout at the top. The quantity of work expended in raising a volume of water to the spout, by this pump, is equal to that required to* lift it through the distance from the level of the water in the cis- tern to the spout. This may be shown in the same manner as was explained under the head of the sucking and forcing- pump. To this quantity of work, must be added the work necessary to overcome the hurtful resistances, as fric- tion, &c. This pump is well adapted to machine pumping, the work being very nearly uniform. A machine, entirely similar to the rotary pump, might be constructed for exhausting foul air from mines ; or, by re- versing the direction of rotation, it might be made to force a supply of fresh air to the bottom of deep mines. Besides the pumps already described, a great variety of others have been invented and used. All, however, 324 MECHANICS. depend upon some modification of the principles that have just been discussed. The Hydrostatic Press. 213. The hydrostatic press is a machine for exerting great pressure through small spaces. It is much used in compressing seeds to obtain oil, in packing hay and bales of goods, also in raising great weights. Its construction, though requiring the use of a sucking-pump, depends upon the prin- ciple of equal pressures (Art. 154). It consists essentially of two vertical cylinders, A and B, each provided with a solid pis- ton. The cylinders communi- cate by means of a pipe (7, whose entrance to the larger cylinder is closed by a sleeping valve E. The smaller cylinder communicates with the reser- voir of water 7T, by a sucking- pipe H, whose upper extremity is closed bythe sleeping-valve D. The smaller piston 7>', is worked up and down by the lever G. By working the lever G, up and down, the water is raised from the reservoir and forced into the larger cylinder A] and when the space below the piston F is tilled, a force of compression is exerted upwards, which is as many times greater than that applied to the piston B, as the area of i^is greater than B (Art. L54). This force may be util- ized in compressing a body L, placed between the piston and the frame of the press. Denote the area of the larger piston by P, of the smaller, by p, the pressure applied to 7>, by/, and that exerted at F, by F; we shall have, FiC, of which the outer one is the longer. To use the instrument, the tube is filled with the liquid in any manner, the end of the longer branch being stopped with the finger or a stop-cock, in which case, the pressure of the atmosphere will prevent the liquid from escaping Fig. no. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINFS. 327 at the other end. The instrument is then inverted, the end C being submerged in the liquid, and the stop removed from A, The liquid will begin to flow through the tube, and the flow will continue till the level of the liquid in the reservoir reaches that of the mouth of the tube C. To find the velocity with which water will issue from the siphon, let us consider an infinitely small layer at the orifice A This layer will be pressed downwards, by the tension of the atmosphere exerted on the surface of the reservoir, diminished by the weight of the water in the branch BD, and increased by the weight of the water in the branch BA. It will be pressed upwards by the tension of the atmosjmere acting directly upon the layer. The difference of these forces, is the weight of the water in the portion of the tube DA, and the velocity of the stratum will be due to that weight. Denoting the vertical height of DA, by h, we shall have, for the velocity (Art. 173), This is the theoretical velocity, but it is never quite realized in practice, on account of resistances, which have been neglected in the preceding investigation. The siphon may be filled by applying the mouth to the end A, and exhausting the air by suction. The tension of the atmosphere, on the upper surface of the reservoir, will press the water up the tube, and fill it, after which the flow will go on as before. Sometimes, a sucking-tube AD, is in- serted near the opening A, and rising nearly to the bend of the siphon. In this case, the opening A, is closed, and the air exhausted through the sucking-tube AD, after which the flow goes on as before. The Wurtemburg Siphon. 215. In the Wurtemburg siphon, the ends of the tube are 328 MECHANICS. GZ\ m <&) bent twice, at right-angles, as shown in the figure. The advantage of this arrangement is, that the tube, once filled, remains so, as long as the plane of its axis is kept vertical. The siphon may be lifted out and replaced at pleasure, thereby stopping the flow at will. It is to be observed that the siphon is only effectual when the distance from the highest point of the tube to the level of the water in the reservoir is less than the height at which the atmospheric pressure will sustain a column of water in a vacuum. This will, in general, be less than 3-4 feet. Fig. 181. The Intermitting Siphon. 216. The intermitting siphon is represented in the figure. AB is a curved tube issuing from the bottom of a reservoir. The reservoir is supplied with water by a tube E, having a smaller bore than that of the siphon. To explain its action, suppose the reservoir at first to be empty, and the tube E to be opened; as soon as the reservoir is filled to the level of CD, the water will begin to flow from the opening B, and the flow once commenced, will continue till the level of the reservoir is again reduced to the level CD', drawn through the opening A. The flow will then cease till the cistern is again filled to CD, and so on as before. Fie-. 1S2. Intermitting Springs. 217. Let A represent a subterranean cavity, communi- Cating with the surface of the earth by a channel AI><\ bent like a siphon. Suppose the reservoir to lie fed by percolation through the crevices, or by a small channel D. When the HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 329 water in the reservoir rises to the height of the horizontal plane BD, the flow will commence at C, and, if the chan- nel is sufficiently large, the flow will continue till the water is reduced to the level plane drawn through C. An inter- mission of flow will occur till the reservoir is again tilled, and so on, intermittingly. This phenomena has been observed at various places. Siphon of Constant Flow. 218. We have seen that the velocity of efflux depends upon the height of the water in the reservoir above the external opening of the siphon. When the water is drawn off from the reservoir, the upper surface sinks, this height diminishes, and, consequently, the velocity continually diminishes. If, however, the shorter branch <7Z>, of the tube, be inserted through a piece of cork large enough to float the .siphon, the instrument will sink as the upper surface is depressed, the height of DA will remain the same, and, consequently, the flow will be uniform till the bend of the siphon comes in contact with the upper edge of the reservoir. By suitably adjusting the siphon in the cork, the velocity of efflux can be increased or decreased within certain limits. In this manner, any desired quantity of the fluid can be drawn off" in a given time. The siphon is used in the arts, for decanting liquids, when it is desirable not to stir the sediment at the bottom of a vessel. It is also employed to draw a portion of a liquid from the interior of a vessel when that liquid is overlaid by one of less specific gravity. The Hydraulic Ram. 219. The hydraulic ram is a machine for raising watei by means of shocks caused by the sudden stoppages of a stream of water. The instrument consists of a reservoir .7?, which is sup- plied with water by an inclined pipe A ; on the upper surface 330 MECHANICS. Fig. 184 of the reservoir, is an orifice which may be closed by a spherical valve D\ this valve, when not pressed against the opening, rests in a metallic framework immediately below the orifice ; G is an air-vessel communicating with the reser- voir by an orifice F, which is fitted with a spherical valve E\ this valve closes the orifice F, except when forced upwards, in which case its motion is restrained by a metallic frame work or cage ; // represents a delivery-pipe entering the air-vessel at its upper part, and terminating near the bot- tom. At P is a small valve, opening inwards, to supply the loss of air in the air-vessel, arising from absorption by the water in passing through the air vessel. To explain the action of the instrument, suppose, at first, that it is empty, and all the parts in equilibrium. If a cur- rent of water be admitted to the reservoir, through the in- clined pipe A, the reservoir will soon be filled, and com- mence rushing out at the orifice C. The impulse of the water will force the spherical valve Z>, upwards, closing the opening ; the velocity of the water in the reservoir will be suddenly checked ; the reaction will force open the valve F, and a portion of the water will enter the air-chamber G. The force of the shock having been expended, the spherical valves will both fall by their own weight ; a second shock will take place, as before ; an additional quantity of water will be forced into the air-vessel, and so on, indefinite!}'. As the water is forced up into the air-vessel, the air becomes compressed; and acting by its elastic force, it urges a stream of water up the pipe // The shocks occur in rapid succes- sion, and, at each shock, a quantity of water is forced into the air-chamber, and thus a constant stream is kept up. To explain the use of the valvt ]\ it maybe remarked that water absorbs more air under a great pressure, than under HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 331 a smaller one. Henee, as it passes through the air-chamber, a portion of the air contained is taken up by the water and carried out through the pipe H. But each time that the valve D falls, there is a tendency to produce a vacuum in the upper part of the reservoir, in consequence of the rush of the fluid to escape through the opening. The pres- sure of the external air then forces the valve P open, a small portion of air enters, and is afterwards forced up with the water into the vessel (r, to keep up the supply. The hydraulic ram is only used where it is required to raise small quantities of water, such as for the supply of a house, or garden. Only a small fraction of the amount of fluid which enters the supply-pipe actually passes out through the delivery-pipe; but, if the head of water is pretty large, the column may be raised to a great height. Water is often raised, in this manner, to the highest points of lofty buildings. Sometimes, an additional air-vessel is introduced over the valve E, for the purpose of deadening the shock of the valve in its play up and down. Archimedes' Screw. 220. This machine is intended for raising water through small heights, and consists, in its simplest form, of a tube wound spirally around a cylinder. This cylinder is mounted so that its axis is oblique to the horizon, the lower end dip- ping into the reservoir. When the cylinder is turned on its axis, by a crank attached to its upper extremity, the lower end of the tube describes a circumference of a circle, whose plane is perpendicular to the axis. When the mouth of the tube comes to the level of the axis and begins to ascend, there will be a certain quantity of water in the tube, which will flow so as to occupy the lowest part of the spire; and, if the cylinder is properly inclined to the horizon, this flow will be towards the upper end of the tube. At each revolution, an additional quantity of water will enter the tube, and that already in the tube will be forced, or raised, higher and 332 MECHANICS. Fig. 1S5. higher, till, at last, it will flow from the orifice at the upper end of the spiral tube. The Chain Pump. 221. The chain pump is an instrument for raising wate» through small elevations. It consists of an endless chain passing over two wheels, A and J3, having their axes horizontal, the one being below the surface of the water, and the other above the spout of the pump. At- tached to this chain, and at right angles to it, are a system of circular disks, just fitting the tube CD. If the cylinder A be turned in the di- rection of the arrow-head, the buckets or disks will rise through the tube CD, carrying the water in the tube before them, until it reaches the spout C, and escapes. The buckets thus emptied return through the air to the reservoir, and so on perpetually. One great objection to this machine is, the difficulty of making the buckets fit the tube of the pump. Hence* there is a constant leakage, requiring a great additional expend- iture of force. Sometimes, instead of having the body of the pump ver- tical, it is inclined ; in which case it does not differ much in principle from the wheel with fiat buckets, that has been used for raising water. The Air Pump. 222. The air pump is a machine for rarefying the air ir. a closed space. It consists of a cylindrical barrel A, in which a piston B, fitting air-tight, is work- ed up and down by a \e\ ;•:■ C\ attached to a piston-rod D. The barrel communi- cates with an air-tight ves- Fig. 186. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 333 sel E, called a receiver, by means of a narrow pipe. The receiver, which is usually of glass, is ground so as to fit air- tight upon a smooth bed-plate KK. The joint between the receiver and plate may be rendered more perfectly air-tight by rubbing it with a little oil. A stop-cock //, of a peculiar construction, permits communication to be made at pleasure between the barrel and receiver, or between the barrel and the external air. When the stop-cock is turned in a partic- ular direction, the barrel and receiver are made to commu- nicate ; but on turning it through 90 degrees, the communi- cation with the receiver is cut off, and a communication is opened between the barrel and the external air. Instead of the stop-cock, valves are often used, which are either opened and closed by the elastic force of the air, or by the force that works the pump. The communicating pipe should be exceedingly small, and the piston B should, when at its low- est point, fit accurately to the bottom of the barrel. To explain the action of the air pump, suppose the pLston to be depressed to its lowest position. The stop-cock H, is turned so as to open a communication between the barrel and receiver, and the piston is raised to its highest point by a force applied to the lever C. The air which before occu- pied the receiver and pipe, will expand so as to fill the bar- rel, receiver, and pipe. The stop-cock is then turned so as to cut oft' communication between the barrel and receiver, and open the barrel to the external air, and the piston again de- pressed to its lowest position. The rarefied air in the barrel is expelled into the external air by the depression of the piston. The air in the receiver is now more rarefied than at the beginning, and by a continued repetition of the process just described, any degree of rarefaction may be attained. To measure the degree of rarefaction of the air in the receiver, a siphon-gauge may be used, or a glass tube, 30 inches long, may be made to communicate at its upper extremity with the receiver, whilst its lower extremity dips into a cistern of mercury. As the air is rarefied in the receiver, the pressure on the mercury in the tube becomes 334 MECHANICS. less than that on the surface of the mercury in the cistern, and the mercury rises in the tube. The tension of the air in the receiver will be given by the difference between the height of the barometric column and that of the mercury in the tube. To investigate a formula for computing the tension of the air in the receiver, after any number of double strokes, let us denote the capacity of the receiver in cubic feet, by r, that of the connecting-pipe, by p, and the space between the bottom of the barrel and the highest position of the piston, by b. Denote the original tension of the air, by t ; its tension after the first upward stroke of the piston, by t '; after the second, third, ...»'*, upward strokes, by *, r, . . . f. The air which originally occupied the receiver and pipe, fills the receiver, pipe, and barrel, after the first upward stroke ; according to Mariotte's law, its tension in the two cases varies inversely as the volumes occupied ; hence, t • t' : : p + r + b : p + r, .% t' = t p + f • In like manner, w r e shall have, after the second upward stroke, f : t" : : p + r + b : p + r, .-. t" = t' p -f b + r Substituting for t' its value, deduced from the preceding equation, we have, t" - 1( p+r V In like manner, we find, pArt \ s . " = *(- \p b + r HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINES. 335 and, in general, *> = «( . ;t: ) '• If the pipe is exceedingly small, its capacity may be neglected in comparison with that of the receiver, and we shall then have, < = , and then con- fined as before, by turning the stop-cock E. The principle of IIeko's ball is the same as that of the air- chamber in the forcing pump and fire-engine, already ex- plained. HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC MACHINE8. 337 i 3d Fig. 188 Hero's Fountain. 225. Hero's fountain is constructed on the same prin- ciple as Hero's ball, except that the compression of the air is effected by the weight of a column of water, instead of by aid of a condenser A represents a cistern, similar to Hero's ball, with a tube J5, extending nearly to the bottom of the cis- tern. C is a second cistern placed at some distance below A. This cistern is connected with a basin D, by a bent tube E, and also with the upper part of the cistern A, by a tube F. When the fountain is to be used, the cistern A is nearly filled with water, the cistern C being empty. A quantity of water is then poured into the basin _Z), which, acting by its weight, sinks into the cistern C, compressing the air in the upper portion of it into a smaller space, thus increasing its tension. This increase of tension acting on the surface of the water in A, forces a jet through the tube J5, which rises to a greater or less height according to the greater or less increase of the atmospheric tension. The flow will con- tinue till the level of the water in A, reaches the bottom of the tube B. The measure of the compressing force on a unit of surface of the water in G 7 , is the weight of a column of water, whose base is a square unit, and whose altitude is the difference of level between the water in D and C. If Hero's ball be partially filled with water and placed under the receiver of an air pump, the water will be ob- served to rise in the tube, forming a fountain, as the air in the receiver is exhausted. The principle is the same as before, an excess of pressure on the water within the globe over that without. In both cases, the flow is resisted by the tension of the air without, and is urged on by the tension within. Wine-Taster and Dropping-Bottle. 226. The wine-taster is used to bring up a small por- 338 MECHANICS. tion of wine or other liquid, from a cask. It consists of a tube, open at the top, and terminat- ing below in a very narrow tube, also open. When it is to be used, it is inserted to any depth in the liquid, which will rise in the tube to the level of the upper surface of that liquid. The finger is then placed so as to close the upper orifice of the tube, and the instrument is raised out of the !g ' cask. A portion of the fluid escapes from the lower orifice, until the pressure of the rarefied air in the tube, plus the weight of a column of liquid, whose cross-section is that of the tube, and whose altitude is that of the column of fluid retained, is just equal to the pressure of the external air. If the tube be placed over a tumbler, and the finger re- moved from the upper orifice, the fluid brought up will escape into the tumbler. If the lower orifice is very small, a few drops may be allowed to escape, by taking off the finger and immediately replacing it. The instrument then constitutes the dropping tube. The Atmospheric Inkstand. 227. The atmospheric inkstand consists of a cylinder A, which communicates by a tube with a second cylinder B. A piston C, is moved JP up and down in A, by means of a screw D. Suppose the spaces A and B, to be filled with ink. If the piston G is raised, the pressure of the external air forces the ink to follow it, and the part B is emptied. If the F ig. lto operation be reversed, and the piston C depressed, the ink is again forced into the space B. This operation may be repeated at pleasure. r c APPENDIX. The following notes contain elementary demonstrations of those principles, which in the body of the work are proved by means of the Calculus. Note on Articles 64—70 ; pp. 72—76. These articles may be omitted without at all impairing the unity of the subject, the preceding principles being suf- ficient to find the centre of gravity of all bodies, approxima- tively. Note on Articles 112—114; pp. 143—148. The principal formulas in these articles may be deduced as follows : 112. By definition, a body moves uniformly when it passes over equal spaces in equal times; now if it passes over a space v in one second, it will pass over t times that space in t seconds ; that is, it will pass over a space vt. If we suppose it to have passed over a space s' before the com- mencement of the time t, we shall have for the entire space passed over, and which may be denoted by s, 8 = Vt + %* (58.) This equation corresponds to Equation (58) of the text. 113. The formulas of Article 113 may be omitted with- out impairing the unity of the course. They are only of use in Higher Mechanics, where the employment of the Cal- culus is a necessity. 340 MECHANICS. 114. Uniformly varied motion, is that in which the velocity increases or diminishes uniformly. In the former case the motion is accelerated, in the latter it is retarded. In both cases the moving force is constant. Denote the moving force by/*, the mass moved being the unit of mass. According to Art. 24, the measure of the force is the ve- locity impressed in a unit of time, that is, in 1 second. Now from the principal of inertia, Art. 18, it follows that a force will produce the same general effect upon a body, whethei it finds the body at rest or in motion. Hence, the velocity impressed in any second of time is constant ; that is, if the velocity impressed in one second of time is f in t seconds it will be t times f or ft. Denoting the velocity by v, we shall have, v =ft (69.) If the body has a velocity v' at the beginning of the time t, this velocity is called the initial velocity. Adding this to the velocity imparted during the time t, we have, V = v' + ft (67.) With respect to the space passed over, it may be re- marked that the velocity increases uniformly ; hence the space passed over in any time, is the same that it would have passed over in the same time, had it moved uniformly during that time with its mean or average velocity. Now, if a body start from a state of rest, its velocity at starting is 0, and at the end of the time t it is ft, Equation (69) ; the average or mean of these is \ft. But the space described in the time t, when the body moves with the uniform ve- locity \ft, is (Equation 55) equal to \ft x t ; denoting the space by *, we have, s = ift* (70.) Kin Equation (70), we make t — \, we have, s - \f\ or, f= 2s; APPENDIX. 341 that is, if a body moves from a state of rest, the space de- scribed in the first second of time, is equal to half the measure of the accelerating force ; or, the acceleration is measured by twice the space passed over in one second of time. If we suppose that a body starts from rest before the be- ginning of the tinie t, so as to pass over a space s r before the beginning of t, it will during that time have acquired some velocity, which we may denote by v'. The space reckoned from the origin of spaces up to the position of the body at the end of the time £, is made up of three parts ; first, the space s\ called the initial space ; second, a space due to the velocity v' during the time t, which is measured by v't; third, a space due to the action of the incessant force during the time t, which will (Equation 70) be equal to ift 2 . Adding these together, we have finally, 8 = *'+ V't+ \f& . . . (68.) If, in Equations (67) and (68), we suppose /to be essen- tially positive, the motion will be accelerated ; if we suppose it to be essentially negative, the motion will be retarded, and these equations become v = v' -ft (VI.) s = 8 >+ v 't- \f& . . . . (72.) Note on Article 121, pp. 163—164. The formula deduced in the first part of this article is needed in the investigations of Acoustics and Optics, and can only be found by the Calculus This part of the article may be omitted without impairing the unity of the course. Note on Article 123, pp. 166—168. This article, up to the end of Equation (95), may be re- placed by the following demonstration: U2 MECHANICS. The simple pendulum. 123. A pendulum is a heavy body suspended from a horizontal axis about which it is free to vibrate. In order to investigate the circumstances of vibration, let us first consider the hypothetical case of a single material point, vibrating about an axis to which it is attached by a rod destitute of weight. Such a pendulum is called a simple pendulum. The laws of vibration in this case will be identical with those explained in Art. 120, the arc ABC being an arc of a circle. Let AB C be the arc through which the vibration takes place, and denote its radius DA, by I. The angle ABC is called the amplitude of vibration ; half of this angle, ABB, is called the angle of deviation. If the point starts from rest at A, it will, on reaching any point If, have a velocity v, due to the height EK, denoted by A, (Art. 120). Hence, (92.) Let us suppose that the angle of deviation is so small, that the chords of the arcs AB and HB, may be considered equal to the arcs themselves. We shall have (Davies' Le- gendre, Bk. IV., Prop. XXIIL, Cor.), AB 2 = 21 x EB, and 1W = 21 x KB, whence, by subtraction, AB 2 - IIB 2 - 2l(EB - KB) = 21 x A. APPENDIX. 34-3 Denoting AB by a, and HB by jc, and solving the last equation, we have, 21 Substituting this value of h in (92) it becomes, v = yJJ{a? - a?) .... (a.) Now let us develop the arc ABC into a straight line .4'.Z?' 0", and suppose a material point to start from A' at the same time that the pendulum starts from A, and to vibrate back and forth upon A'B' C with the same veloci- ties as the pendulum ; then, when the pendulum is at any point JET, this material point will be at the corresponding point H\ and the times of vibration of the two will be exactly the same. To find the time of vibration along the line A'B'C, de- scribe upon it a semi-circle A'3fC, and suppose a third material point to start from A' at the same time as the second, and to move uniformly around the arc with a ve- locity equal to a \J j • Then will the time required for this particle to reach C be equal to the space divided by the velocity (Art. 112). Denoting this time by t, and re- membering that A'B' = a, we shall have, g v g Make ITB' = x, and draw WM perpendicular to A' C\ and at M decompose the velocity of the third particle MT into two components 3IN~ and MQ, respectively par- allel and perpendicular to A'C. 344 mecha:sics. We shall have for the horizontal component JIN", MN = JIT cos TMN. But, JUT = «\/f, and because JIT and JAY are re- spectively perpendicular to B ' JI and II' JI, we have, cos TJIX = cos B'JIIF = ~^ L - But JB'Jf = a, and II'JI — J a? — # 2 ; hence, cos TJIX = v a Substituting these values in Equation (5), we have for the horizontal velocity, Mir = y^ - »?), which is the same value as that obtained for v in Equa- tion (a). Hence, we infer that the velocity of the third material point in the direction of A' C is always equal to that of the second point, consequently the times required to pass from A' to C must be equal ; that is, the time of vibration of the second point, and consequently of the pendulum, must be ttyj - • Denoting this time by f, we have, < = V? {95 - ] Note on Article 131, pp. 182—186. This article may be omitted without impairing the unity of the course. The results may be assumed if needed. They can only be deduced by the Calculus by demon- strations too tedious for an Elementary Course. THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. MATHEMATICS. DAYIES'S COMPLETE SERIES- ARITHMETIC. Davies' Primary Arithmetic. Davies' Intellectual Arithmetic. Davies' Elements of Written Arithmetic. Davies' Practical Arithmetic. Davies' University Arithmetic. TWO-BOOK SERIES. First Book in Arithmetic, Primary and Mental. Complete Arithmetic. ALGEBRA. Davies' New Elementary Algebra. Davies' University Algebra. Davies' New Bourdon's Algebra. GEOMETRY. Davies' Elementary Geometry and Trigonometry. Davies' Legendre's Geometry. Davies' Analytical Geometry and Calculus. Davies' Descriptive Geometry. Davies' New Calculus. MENSURATION. Davies' Practical Mathematics and Mensuration. Davies' Elements of Surveying. Davies' Shades, Shadows, and Perspective. MATHEMATICAL SCIENCE. Davies' Grammar of Arithmetic. Davies' Outlines of Mathematical Science. Davies' Nature and Utility of Mathematics. Davies' Metric System. Davies & Peck's Dictionary of Mathematics. 17 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. DAVIES'S NATIONAL COURSE OF MATHEMATICS. ITS RECORD. In claiming for this series the first place among American text-books, of whatever class, the publishers appeal to the magnificent record which its volumes have earneq during the thirty-fine years of Dr. Charles Davies's mathematical labors. The unremit- ting exertions of a life-time have placed tins modem series on the same proud eminence among competitors that each of its predecessors had successively enjoyed in a course of constantly improved editions, now rounded to their perfect fruition, — for it seems almost that this science is susceptible of no further demonstration. During the period alluded to, many authors and editors in this department Iipvb started into public notice, and, by borrowing ideas and processes original with Dr. Davies, have enjoyed a brief popularity, but are now almost unknown. Many of the series of to-day, built upon a similar basis, and described as " modern books," are destined to a similar fate; while the most far-seeing eye will find it difficult to fix the time, on the basis of any data afforded by their past history, when these books will cease to increase and prosper, and lix a still (inner hold on the affection of every educated American. One cause of this unparalleled popularity is found in the fact that the enterprise of the author did not cease with the original completion of his books. Always a practical teacher, he has incorporated in his text-books from time to time the advantages or every improvement in methods of teaching, and every advance in science. During all the years in which he has been laboring lie constantly submitted his own theories ami those of others to the practical test of the class-room, approving, rejecting, or modifying them as the experience thus obtained might suggest. In this way he has been aide to produce an almost perfect series of class-books, in which every department of mathematics lias received minute and exhaustive attention. Upon the death of Dr. Davies, which took place in 1876, his work was immediately taken up by his former pupil and mathematical associate of many years, Prof. W. G. Peck, L.L.D., of Columbia College. By him, with Prof. J. H. Van Amringe, of Columbia College, the original series is kept carefully revised and up to the times. Davies's System is the ACKNOWLEDGES National Stan-dard for the United States, for the following reasons: — 1st, It is the basis nf instruction in the great national schools at West Point and Annapolis. 2d. It has received the quasi indorsement of the National Congress. 3d. It is exclusively used in the public schools of the National Capital 4th. The officials of the Government use it as authority in all cases Involving mathe- matical questions. 5th. Our great soldiers and sailors commanding the national armies and navies were e lucated in tins system. So have been a majority of eminent scientists in this country. All these refer to " Davies" as authority. 6th. A larger number of American citizens have received their education from (his than from any other - 7th. The series has a larger circulation throughout the whole coun fay than any other, being extensively used in every State in the Union. It THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. DAVIES AND PECK'S ARITHMETICS. OPTIONAL OR CONSECUTIVE. The best thoughts of these two illustrious mathematicians are combined in the following beautiful works, which are tlie natural successors of Davies's Arithmetics, sumptuously printed, and bound in crimson, green, and gold: — Davies and Peck's Brief Arithmetic. Also called the " Elementary Arithmetic." It is the shortest presentation of the sub- ject, and is adequate for all grades in common schools, being a thorough introduction to practical life, except for the specialist. At first the authors play with the little learner for a few lessons, by object-teaching and kindred allurements ; but he soon begins to realize that study is earnest, as he becomes familiar with the simpler operations, and is delighted lo hud himself master of important results. The second part reviews the Fundamental Operations on a scale proportioned to the enlarged intelligence of the learner. It establishes the General Principles and Properties of Numbers, ami then ] loceeds to Fractions. Currency and the Metric System are fully treated in connet won with Decimals. Compound Numbers and Re- duction follow, and finally Percentage with all its varied appli cations. An Index of words and principles concludes the book, for which every scholar and most teachers will be grateful. How much time has been spent in searching for a half- forgotten definition or principle in a former lesson ! Davies and Peck's Complete Arithmetic. This work certainly deserves its name in the best sense. Though complete, it is not, like most others which bear the same title, cumbersome. These authors excel in clear, lucid demonstrations, teaching the science pure and simple, yet not ignoring convenient methods and practical applications. For turning out a thorough business man no other work is so well adapted. He will have a clear comprehension of the science as a whole, and a working acquaintance with details which must serve him well in all emergencies. Distinguishing features of the book are the logical progression of the subjects and the great variety of practical problems, not puzzles, which are beneath the dignity of educational science. A clear- minded critic has said of Dr. Peck's work that it is free from that juggling with numbers which some authors falsely call " Analysis." A series of Tables for converting ordinary weights and measures into the Metric System appear in the later editions. PECK'S ARITHMETICS. Peck's First Lessons in Numbers. This book begins with pictorial illustrations, and unfolds gradually the science of numbers. It noticeably simplifies the subject by developing the principles of addition and subtraction simultaneously ; as it does, also, those of multiplication and division. Peck's Manual of Arithmetic. This book is designed especially 'or those who seek sufficient instruction to carry them successfully through practical life, but have not time for extended study. Peck's Complete Arithmetic. This completes the series but is a much briefer book than most of the complete arithmetics, and is recommended not only for what it contains, but also for what is omitted. It may be said of Dr. Peck's books more truly than of any other series published, that they are clear and simple in definition and rule, and that" superfluous matter of every kind has been faithfully eliminated, thus magnifying the working value of the book and saving unnecessary expense of time and labor. 19 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. Algebra. The student's progress in Algebra depends very Largely npon the proper treat- ment of the four Fundamental Operation*. The terms Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Jjirision in Algebra have a wider meaning than in Arithmetic, and these operations have been so defined as to include their arithmetical meaning ; so that the beginner is sinrily called upon to enlarge his views of those fundamental operations. Much attention has been given to the explanation of the negative sign, in order to remove the well-known difficulties in the. use and interpretation of that sign. Special attention is here called to " A Short Method of Removing Symbols of Aggregation," Art 76. On account of their importance, the BUOJects ol Factoring, Greatrst Common lHrist>r, and Least Common Multiple have been treated al greater length than is usual in elementary works. In the treatment of Fractions, a method is used which is quite simple, and, at the same time, more general than that usually employed. In connection with Radical s the roots are expressed by fractional exponents, for the principles and rules applicable to integral exponents may then be used without modification. The Equation is made the chief subject of thought in this work. It is defined near the beginning, and used extensively in every chapter. In addition to this, four chapters are devoted exclusively to the subject of Equations. All Proportions are equations, and in their treatment as such all the difficulty commonly connected with the subject of Proportion disappears. The chapter on Logarithms will doubtless be acceptable to many teachers who do not require the student to master Higher Algebra before entering upon the study of Trigonometry. HIGHER MATHEMATICS. Peck's Manual of Algebra. Bringing the methods of Bourdon within the range of the Academic Course. Peck's Manual of Geometry. By a method purely practical, and unembarrassed by the details which rather confuse than simplify science. Peck's Practical Calculus. Peck's Analytical Geometry. Peck's Elementary Mechanics. Peck's Mechanics, with Calculus. The briefest treatises on these subjects now published. Adopted by the great Univer- sities : rale, Harvard, Columbia, Princeton, Cornell, &e Macnie's Algebraical Equations. Serving as a e plemenl to the more advanced treatises on Algebra, giving special attention to the analysis and solution of equations with numerical coefficients. Church's Elements of Calculus. Church's Analytical Geometry. Church's Descriptive Geometry. "With plates. £ vois. These volumes constitute the "West Point Course" in their several departments. Pr< it. Church was long the eminent professor of mathematics at West Point Military Academy, and his works are standard in all the leading colleges. Courtenay's Elements of Calculus. A standard work of the very highest grade, presenting the most elaborate attainable butv( y ol Hackley's Trigonometry. With applications to Navigation and Surveying, Nautical and Practical Geometry, and Geodesy. 21 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. '7\-;?3ssi 1 HvS i|/ 1 L^i^Jj^J^ GENERAL HISTORY. Monteith's Youth's History of the United States. A History of the United States for beginners. It is arranged upon the catechetical plan, with illustrative maps and engravings, review questions, dates in parentheses (that their study may be optional with the younger class of learners), and interesting biographical sketches of all persons who have been prominently identified with the history of our country. Willard's United States. School and University Editions. The plan of this standard work is chronologically exhibited in front of the titlepage. The maps and sketches are found useful assistants "to the memory ; and dates, usually so difficult to remember, are so systematically arranged as in a great degree to obviate the difficulty. Candor, impartiality, and accuracy are the distinguishing features of the narrative portion. Willard's Universal History. New Edition. The most valuable features of the li United States " are reproduced in this. The peculiarities of the work are its great conciseness and the prominence given to the chronological order of events. The margin marks each successive era with great dis- tinctness, so that the pupil retains not only the event but its time, and thus fixes the order of history firmly and usefully in his mind. Mrs. Willard's books are constantly revised, and at all times written up to embrace important historical events of recent date. Professor Arthur Gilman has edited the last twenty-five years to 1882. Lancaster's English History. By the Master of the Stoughton Grammar School, Boston. The most practical of the "brief books." Though short, it is not a bare and uninteresting outline, but contains enough of explanation and detail to make intelligible the cause mid effect of events. Their relations to the history and development of the American people is made specially prominent. Willis's Historical Reader. Being Collier's Great Events of History adapted to American schools. This rare epitome of general history, remarkable for its charming style and judicious selection of events on which the destinies of nations have turned, has been skilfully manipulated by Professor Willis, with as few changes as would bring the United States into its ] in iper position in the historical perspective. As reader or text-book it has few equals and no superior. Berard's History of England. By an authoress well known for the success of her History of the United States. • I life of the English people is felicitously interwoven, as in fact, with the civil and military transactions of the realm. Ricord's History of Rome. Possesses the charm of an romance. The fables with which this history abounds are introduced in such a way as not to deceive the inexperienced, while adding materially to the value of the work as t reliable index to the character and institutions, as well as the historv of the Roman people. THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. vwrte m m \& * M ■i * l i? if ; ]• f 1 A Brief History of An- cient Peoples. With an account of their monuments, literature, and manners. 340 12mo. Profusely illustrated. In this work the political history, which occupies nearly, if not all, the ordinary school text, is con to the salient and essential facts, in order to give room for a clear outline of the literature, religion, architecture, character, habits, &c, of each nation. Surely it is as important to know some- thing aboui Plato as all about Caesar, and to learn how the ancients wrote their hooks as how they fought their battles. The chapters OH Manners and Cus- toms ami the Scenes in Real Life repre- sent the people of history as men and women subject, tnthc same wants, hopes ami fears as ourselves, and so brine the distant past near to us. The Scenes, which are intended only for reading, are the result of a careful study of the unequalled collect ions oj monuments in the London and Berlin Museums, of the ruins in Rome and Pompeii, and of the latest authorities on the domestic life of ancient peoples. Though intei I written in a semi-romantic style, they are accurate pictures of what might have occurred, and some of them are simple transcriptions of the details sculptured in Assyrian alabaster or painted on Egyptian walls. 36 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. HISTORY — Continued. The extracts made from the sacred books of the East are not specimens of their style and teachings, but only gems selected often from a mass of matter, much of which would be absurd, meaningless, and even revolting. It has not seemed best to cumber a book like this with selections conveying no moral lesson. Ihe numerous cross-references, the abundant dates in parenthesis, the pronunciation of the names in the Index, the choice reading references at the close of each general subject, and the novel Historical Recreations in the Appendix, will be of service to teacher and pupil alike. Though designed primarily for a text-book, a large class of persons — general readers, who desire to know something about the progress of historic criticism and Aie recent discoveries made among the resurrected monuments of the East, but have no leisure to read the ponderous volumes of Brugsch, Layard, Grote, Mommsen, and lime — will tiud this volume just what they need. From Homer B. Spkague, HeaJ Master Girls' High School, If 'est Newton St. , Bos- ton, Muss. " I beg to recommend in strong terms the adoption of Barnes's 'History of Ancient Peoples' as a text-book. It is about as nearly perfect as could be hoped for. The adoption would give great relish to the study of Ancient History." HE Brief History of France. By the author of the " Bri f United States." with all the attractive features of that popu- u work (which see) and new ones of its own. It is believed that the History of France has never before been presented in such brief compass, and this is effected without sacrificing one particle of interest. The book reads like a romance, and, while drawing tht student by an irresistible fascination to his task, impresses the great outlines indelibly upon the memory. 27 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. DRAWING. BARNES'S POPULAR DRAWING SERIES. Based upon the experience of the most successful teachers of drawing in the United States. The Primary Course, consisting of a manual, ten cards, and three primary Irawing I is, a. B. and U. Intermediate Course. Four numbers and a manual. Advanced Course. Four numbers and a manual. Instrumental Course. Pour numbers and a manual. iiie Intermediate, Advanced, and Instrumental Courses are furnished either in book or <-ar>l lorm at the same prici s. The books contain tin-usual blanks, with the unusual advantage of opening from the pupil, — placing the copy directly in front and above the blank, thus occupying hut little desk-room. The cards are in the end more econom- ical than the books, if used in connection with the patent blank folios that accompany this series. The cards are arranged to be bound (or tied) in the folios and removed at pleasure. The pupil at the end of each number has a complete book, containing only his own work, while the copies are preserved and inserted in another fol.o ready for use in the next class. Patent Blank Folios. No. 1. Adapted to Intermediate Course. No. 2. Adapted to Advanced and Instrumental Courses. ADVANTAGES OF THIS SERIES. The Plan and Arrangement. — The examples are so arranged that teachers and pupils can see, at a glance, how they are to be treated and where they are to be copied. In this system, copying and designing do not receive all the attention. The plan is broader in its aims, dealing with drawing as a branch of common-school instruction, asd giving it a wide educational value. Correct Methods. — In this system the pupil is led to rely upon himself, and not upon delusive mechanical aids, as printed guide-marks, &c. One of the principal objects of any good course in freehand drawing is to educate the eye to estimate, location, form, and size. A system which weakens the motive or re- moves the necessity Of thinking is false in theory and ruinous in practice. The object should be to educate, not cram ; to develop the intelligence, not teach tricks. Artistic Effect —The beautj of the examples is not destroyed by crowding the pages with useless and badly printed text. The Manuals contain all necessary instruction. Stages of Development. —Many of the examples are accompanied by diagrams, showing the different stag* - of development Lithographed Examples. — The examples are. printed in imitation of pencil drawing (uoi in hard, blach lines) that the pupil's work may resemble them. One Term's Work. — Each book contains what can be accomplished in an average term, and no more. Thus a pupil finishes one book before beginning another. Quality — not Quantity. —.Success in drawing depends upon the amount of thought exercised by the pupil, and not upon the large number of examples drawn. Designing. — Elementary design is more skilfully taught in this system than by any other, m addition to the instruction given in the books, the pupil will and printed on the inside- of the covers a variety of beautiful patterns. Enlargement and Reduction*. — The practice of enlarging and reducing from cop.es is not commenced mini the pupil is well advanced in the course and therefore better able to cope with this difficult feature in drawing. Natural Forms. -This is the only course that gives at convenient intervals easy and progressive exercises in the drawing of natural forms. Economy. — By the patent binding described above, the copies need no! be tin-own at de when a book is filled out, but arc preserved in perfeel condition for future use. 'ihe blank books, only, will have to De purchased after tlu first introduction, th ing of nmre than half in the usual cost of drawing-books. Manuals for Teachers. — The Manuals accompanying this series contain pra< tical g in the class-room, with definite directions for draw- ing each of the examples in the books, instructions lor designing, model and object tlrawing, drawing from natural forms, &c. 28 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. DRAWING — Continued. Chapman's American £)rawing-Book. The standard American text-book and authority in all branches of art. A compilation of art principles. A manual for the amateur, and basis of study for the professional artist. Adapted for schools and private instruction. Contents. — "Any one who can Learn to Write can Learn to Draw." — Primary In- struction in Drawing. — Rudiments of Drawing the Human ' Head. — Rudiments in Drawing the Human Figure. — Rudiments of Drawing. — The f Geometry. - Ferspective. — Of Studying and Sketching from Nature. —Of Painting. — Etching and En-raving. — Of Modelling. — Of Composition. — Advice to the American Art-Student. The work is of course magnificently illustrated with all the original designs. Chapman's Elementary Drawing-Book. A progressive course of practical exercises, or a text-book for the training of the eye and hand. It contains the elements from the larger work, and a copy should be in the hands of every pupil ; while a copy of the " American Drawing- Book," named above, should be at hand for reference by the class. Clark's Elements of Drawing. A complete course in this graceful art, from the first rudiments of outline to the finished sketches of landscape and scenery. Allen's Map-Drawing and Scale. This method introduces a new era in map-drawing, for the following reasons : 1. It is a system. This is its greatest merit. — 2. It is easily understood and taught. — 3. The eye is trained to exact measurement by the use of a scale. — 4. By no special effort of the memory, distance and comparative size are fixed in the mind. — 5. It dis- cards useless construction of lines. — 6. It can be taught by any teacher, even though there may have been no previous practice in map-drawing. — 7. Any pupil old enough to study geography can learn by this system, in a short time, to draw accurate maps. — 8. The system is not the result of theory, but comes directly from the school-room. It has been thoroughly and successfully tested there, with all grades of pupils. — 9. It is economical, as it requires no mapping plates. It gives the pupil the ability of rapidly drawing accurate maps. FINE ARTS. Hamerton's Art Essays (Atlas Series) : — No. 1. The Practical Work of Painting. With portrait of Rubens. Svo. Paper covers. No. 2. Modern Schools of Art- Including American, English, and Continental Painting. Svo. Paper covers. Huntington's Manual of the Fine Arts. A careful manual of instruction in the history of art, up to the present time. Boyd's Karnes' Elements of Criticism. The best edition of the best work on art and literary criticism ever produced in English. Benedict's Tour Through Europe. A valuable companion for anyone wishing to visit the galleries and sights of the continent of Europe, as well as a charming book of travels. Dwight's Mythology. A knowledge of mythology is necessary to an appreciation of ancient art. Walker's World's Fair. The industrial and artistic display at the Centennial Exhibition. 29 THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. DR. STEELE'S OJME-TERM SERIES, IN ALL THE SCIENCES. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Chemistry. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Astronomy. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Physics. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Geology. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Physiology. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Zoology. Steele's 14-Weeks Course in Botany. Our text-books in these studies are, as a general thing, dull and uninteresting. They contain from 400 to GOO pages of dry facts and unconnected details. They abound in that which the student cannot learn, much less remember. The pupil commences the study, is confused by the hue print and coarse print, and neither knowing exactly what to learn nor what to hasten over, is crowded through the single term generally assigned to each branch, and frequently comes to the close without a definite and exact idea of a single scientific principle. Steele's '• Fourteen. Weeks Courses" contain only that which every well-informed per- son should know, while all that which concerns only the professional scientist is omitted. The language is clear, simple, and interesting, and the illustrations bring the subject within the range of home life and daily experience. They give such of the general principles and the prominent facts as a pupil can make familiar as household words within a single term. The type is large and open; there is no fine print to annoy ; the cuts are copies of genuine experiments or natural phenomena, and are of tine execution. In line, by a system of condensation peculiarly his own. the author reduces each branch to the limits of a single term of study, while sacrificing nothing that is essential, and nothing that is usually retained from the study of the larger manuals in common use. Thus the student has rare opportunity to economize his time, or rather to employ that which he has to the best advantage. A notable feature is the author's charming "style," fortified by an enthusiasm over his subject in which the student will not fail to partake. Believing that Natural Science is full of fascination, he has moulded it into a form that attracts the attention and kindles the enthusiasm of the pupil. The recent editions contain the author's " Practical Questions" on a plan never before attempted in scientific text-books. These are questions as to the nature and cause of common phenomena, and are not directly answered in the text, the design being to test and promote an intelligent use of the student's knowledge of the foregoiDg principles. Steele's Key to all His Works. This work is mainly composed of answers to the Practical Questions, and solutions of the problems, In the author's celebrated " Pourteen-Weeks Courses " in the several sciences, with many hints to teachers, minor tables, fee. Should he on every teacher's desk. Prof. J. Dorman Steele is an indefatigable student, as well as author, and his books have reached a fabulous circulation. It is sate to say of his hooks that they have accomplished more tangible and better results in the class-room than any other ever offered to American schools, and have been translated into more languages for foreign schools. They are even produced in raised type for the blind. 32 \ THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. NATURAL SCIENCE — Continued. BOTANY. Wood's Object-Lessons in Botany. Wood's American Botanist and Florist. Wood's New Class-Book of Botany. The standard text-hooks of the United States in this department. In style they are simple, popular, and lively ; in arrangement, easy and natural ; in description, graphic and scientific. The Tables for Analysis are reduced to a perfect system. They include the flora of the whole Unitr Worman? C'est un veritable tresor, merveilleusement sdapte au devel- oppement de la conversation familiere et pratique, telle qu'on la vent aujourd'hui. silent livre met successive!] scene, d'une maniere vive et inter toutes les circonstances possibles de la vie ordinaire. Voyez l'immense avantage il vous transporte en Frame ; do premier mot, je m'imagine, et mes eleves avec moi, que nous sommes a Paris, dans la rue, sur une place, dans une gare,dans un salon, dans une chambiv, voire meine a Is cui- sine ; je parte comme avec des Prancais ; les eleves ne songent pas a tradnire de 1'anglais pour me repondre ; ils pensent en franc. us ; ils sont Francais pour le moment paries yeux. par l'oreille. par la pens, e Quel autre livre pourrait produire cette illusion ? . . ." Votre tout uevoue, A. DE KOUCEMONT. Illustrated Language Primers. French and English. German and English. Spanish and English. The names of common objects properly illustrated and arranged in easy lessons. Pujol's Complete French Class-Book. Offers in one volume, methodically arranged, a complete French course — usually embraced in series of from five x>> twelve books, including the bulky and expensive lexicon. Here are grammar, conversation, and choice literature, selected from the best French authors. Each branch is thoroughly handled ; and the student, having diligently completed the course as prescribed, may consider himself, without further application, au fait in the most polite and elegant language of modern times. 45 7 DAY USE RETURN TO This publication is due on the LAST DATE and HOUR stamped below. object to recall'^ MONOGRAPH L'jb c;.£Jrs^.' ' iQ l 9i7Z. &39T* Subject to recai; after Aft DU E SE E APR 1 1 1977 LOAN XHEDUIE MONOGRAPH W7f dA see — mm* JAN 1 19 1978 FO* DATE DUE SEE LOAN SCHEDULE RBl7-30m-7,'75 (S7521L)4188 General Library University of California Berkeley YB 23947 834136 j?& net i Library THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY V GO ^-d L m i i o >- - * i *B